WO1999064053A1 - β3-ADRENERGIC RECEPTOR AGONISTS - Google Patents

β3-ADRENERGIC RECEPTOR AGONISTS Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO1999064053A1
WO1999064053A1 PCT/US1999/012907 US9912907W WO9964053A1 WO 1999064053 A1 WO1999064053 A1 WO 1999064053A1 US 9912907 W US9912907 W US 9912907W WO 9964053 A1 WO9964053 A1 WO 9964053A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
ligand
linker
group
substituted
compound
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US1999/012907
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Seok-Ki Choi
Jesse D. Combs
John H. Griffin
Edmund J. Moran
Original Assignee
Advanced Medicine, Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Advanced Medicine, Inc. filed Critical Advanced Medicine, Inc.
Priority to CA002321120A priority Critical patent/CA2321120A1/en
Priority to AU52039/99A priority patent/AU5203999A/en
Priority to EP99937155A priority patent/EP1085894A1/en
Publication of WO1999064053A1 publication Critical patent/WO1999064053A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D213/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D213/60—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D213/72—Nitrogen atoms
    • C07D213/74—Amino or imino radicals substituted by hydrocarbon or substituted hydrocarbon radicals
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C213/00—Preparation of compounds containing amino and hydroxy, amino and etherified hydroxy or amino and esterified hydroxy groups bound to the same carbon skeleton
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/54—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic compound
    • A61K47/55—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic compound the modifying agent being also a pharmacologically or therapeutically active agent, i.e. the entire conjugate being a codrug, i.e. a dimer, oligomer or polymer of pharmacologically or therapeutically active compounds
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A61P11/06—Antiasthmatics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A61P11/08—Bronchodilators
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A61P11/16—Central respiratory analeptics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P13/00—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system
    • A61P13/02—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system of urine or of the urinary tract, e.g. urine acidifiers
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P13/00—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system
    • A61P13/08—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system of the prostate
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P15/00—Drugs for genital or sexual disorders; Contraceptives
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P15/00—Drugs for genital or sexual disorders; Contraceptives
    • A61P15/04—Drugs for genital or sexual disorders; Contraceptives for inducing labour or abortion; Uterotonics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P15/00—Drugs for genital or sexual disorders; Contraceptives
    • A61P15/06—Antiabortive agents; Labour repressants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00—Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A61P17/04—Antipruritics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P21/00—Drugs for disorders of the muscular or neuromuscular system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/02—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for peripheral neuropathies
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/04—Centrally acting analgesics, e.g. opioids
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/06—Antimigraine agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/08—Antiepileptics; Anticonvulsants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/14—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating abnormal movements, e.g. chorea, dyskinesia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/18—Antipsychotics, i.e. neuroleptics; Drugs for mania or schizophrenia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/20—Hypnotics; Sedatives
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/22—Anxiolytics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/24—Antidepressants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/28—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00—Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/02—Ophthalmic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00—Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/16—Otologicals
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/02—Non-specific cardiovascular stimulants, e.g. drugs for syncope, antihypotensives
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/04—Inotropic agents, i.e. stimulants of cardiac contraction; Drugs for heart failure
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/10—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system for treating ischaemic or atherosclerotic diseases, e.g. antianginal drugs, coronary vasodilators, drugs for myocardial infarction, retinopathy, cerebrovascula insufficiency, renal arteriosclerosis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/12—Antihypertensives
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C215/00—Compounds containing amino and hydroxy groups bound to the same carbon skeleton
    • C07C215/46—Compounds containing amino and hydroxy groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having hydroxy groups bound to carbon atoms of at least one six-membered aromatic ring and amino groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms or to carbon atoms of rings other than six-membered aromatic rings of the same carbon skeleton
    • C07C215/56—Compounds containing amino and hydroxy groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having hydroxy groups bound to carbon atoms of at least one six-membered aromatic ring and amino groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms or to carbon atoms of rings other than six-membered aromatic rings of the same carbon skeleton with amino groups linked to the six-membered aromatic ring, or to the condensed ring system containing that ring, by carbon chains further substituted by hydroxy groups
    • C07C215/58—Compounds containing amino and hydroxy groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having hydroxy groups bound to carbon atoms of at least one six-membered aromatic ring and amino groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms or to carbon atoms of rings other than six-membered aromatic rings of the same carbon skeleton with amino groups linked to the six-membered aromatic ring, or to the condensed ring system containing that ring, by carbon chains further substituted by hydroxy groups with hydroxy groups and the six-membered aromatic ring, or the condensed ring system containing that ring, bound to the same carbon atom of the carbon chain
    • C07C215/60—Compounds containing amino and hydroxy groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having hydroxy groups bound to carbon atoms of at least one six-membered aromatic ring and amino groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms or to carbon atoms of rings other than six-membered aromatic rings of the same carbon skeleton with amino groups linked to the six-membered aromatic ring, or to the condensed ring system containing that ring, by carbon chains further substituted by hydroxy groups with hydroxy groups and the six-membered aromatic ring, or the condensed ring system containing that ring, bound to the same carbon atom of the carbon chain the chain having two carbon atoms between the amino groups and the six-membered aromatic ring or the condensed ring system containing that ring
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C217/00—Compounds containing amino and etherified hydroxy groups bound to the same carbon skeleton
    • C07C217/02—Compounds containing amino and etherified hydroxy groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having etherified hydroxy groups and amino groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms of the same carbon skeleton
    • C07C217/04—Compounds containing amino and etherified hydroxy groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having etherified hydroxy groups and amino groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms of the same carbon skeleton the carbon skeleton being acyclic and saturated
    • C07C217/06—Compounds containing amino and etherified hydroxy groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having etherified hydroxy groups and amino groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms of the same carbon skeleton the carbon skeleton being acyclic and saturated having only one etherified hydroxy group and one amino group bound to the carbon skeleton, which is not further substituted
    • C07C217/08—Compounds containing amino and etherified hydroxy groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having etherified hydroxy groups and amino groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms of the same carbon skeleton the carbon skeleton being acyclic and saturated having only one etherified hydroxy group and one amino group bound to the carbon skeleton, which is not further substituted the oxygen atom of the etherified hydroxy group being further bound to an acyclic carbon atom
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C323/00—Thiols, sulfides, hydropolysulfides or polysulfides substituted by halogen, oxygen or nitrogen atoms, or by sulfur atoms not being part of thio groups
    • C07C323/50—Thiols, sulfides, hydropolysulfides or polysulfides substituted by halogen, oxygen or nitrogen atoms, or by sulfur atoms not being part of thio groups containing thio groups and carboxyl groups bound to the same carbon skeleton
    • C07C323/62—Thiols, sulfides, hydropolysulfides or polysulfides substituted by halogen, oxygen or nitrogen atoms, or by sulfur atoms not being part of thio groups containing thio groups and carboxyl groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having the sulfur atom of at least one of the thio groups bound to a carbon atom of a six-membered aromatic ring of the carbon skeleton
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D211/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing hydrogenated pyridine rings, not condensed with other rings
    • C07D211/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing hydrogenated pyridine rings, not condensed with other rings with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D211/06—Heterocyclic compounds containing hydrogenated pyridine rings, not condensed with other rings with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom having no double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D211/36—Heterocyclic compounds containing hydrogenated pyridine rings, not condensed with other rings with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom having no double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D211/40—Oxygen atoms
    • C07D211/42—Oxygen atoms attached in position 3 or 5
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D211/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing hydrogenated pyridine rings, not condensed with other rings
    • C07D211/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing hydrogenated pyridine rings, not condensed with other rings with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D211/06—Heterocyclic compounds containing hydrogenated pyridine rings, not condensed with other rings with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom having no double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D211/36—Heterocyclic compounds containing hydrogenated pyridine rings, not condensed with other rings with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom having no double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D211/56—Nitrogen atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D213/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D213/60—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D213/78—Carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms, with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals
    • C07D213/79—Acids; Esters
    • C07D213/80—Acids; Esters in position 3
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D263/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,3-oxazole rings
    • C07D263/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,3-oxazole rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D263/30—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,3-oxazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D263/32—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,3-oxazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with only hydrogen atoms, hydrocarbon or substituted hydrocarbon radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D263/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,3-oxazole rings
    • C07D263/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,3-oxazole rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D263/30—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,3-oxazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D263/34—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,3-oxazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D265/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings having one nitrogen atom and one oxygen atom as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D265/28—1,4-Oxazines; Hydrogenated 1,4-oxazines
    • C07D265/30—1,4-Oxazines; Hydrogenated 1,4-oxazines not condensed with other rings
    • C07D265/32—1,4-Oxazines; Hydrogenated 1,4-oxazines not condensed with other rings with oxygen atoms directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D277/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings
    • C07D277/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D277/20—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D277/22—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with only hydrogen atoms, hydrocarbon or substituted hydrocarbon radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D277/24—Radicals substituted by oxygen atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D277/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings
    • C07D277/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D277/20—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D277/22—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with only hydrogen atoms, hydrocarbon or substituted hydrocarbon radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D277/28—Radicals substituted by nitrogen atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D277/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings
    • C07D277/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D277/20—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D277/32—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D277/34—Oxygen atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing three or more hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D413/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D413/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings
    • C07D413/06—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings linked by a carbon chain containing only aliphatic carbon atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D413/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D413/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing three or more hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D417/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00
    • C07D417/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D417/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K1/00—General methods for the preparation of peptides, i.e. processes for the organic chemical preparation of peptides or proteins of any length
    • C07K1/04—General methods for the preparation of peptides, i.e. processes for the organic chemical preparation of peptides or proteins of any length on carriers
    • C07K1/047—Simultaneous synthesis of different peptide species; Peptide libraries
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/94—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving narcotics or drugs or pharmaceuticals, neurotransmitters or associated receptors
    • G01N33/9406—Neurotransmitters
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07B—GENERAL METHODS OF ORGANIC CHEMISTRY; APPARATUS THEREFOR
    • C07B2200/00—Indexing scheme relating to specific properties of organic compounds
    • C07B2200/11—Compounds covalently bound to a solid support
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C40—COMBINATORIAL TECHNOLOGY
    • C40B—COMBINATORIAL CHEMISTRY; LIBRARIES, e.g. CHEMICAL LIBRARIES
    • C40B40/00—Libraries per se, e.g. arrays, mixtures
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2333/00—Assays involving biological materials from specific organisms or of a specific nature
    • G01N2333/435—Assays involving biological materials from specific organisms or of a specific nature from animals; from humans
    • G01N2333/575—Hormones
    • G01N2333/62—Insulins
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2333/00—Assays involving biological materials from specific organisms or of a specific nature
    • G01N2333/435—Assays involving biological materials from specific organisms or of a specific nature from animals; from humans
    • G01N2333/705—Assays involving receptors, cell surface antigens or cell surface determinants
    • G01N2333/70578—NGF-receptor/TNF-receptor superfamily, e.g. CD27, CD30 CD40 or CD95
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2333/00—Assays involving biological materials from specific organisms or of a specific nature
    • G01N2333/435—Assays involving biological materials from specific organisms or of a specific nature from animals; from humans
    • G01N2333/705—Assays involving receptors, cell surface antigens or cell surface determinants
    • G01N2333/72—Assays involving receptors, cell surface antigens or cell surface determinants for hormones
    • G01N2333/726—G protein coupled receptor, e.g. TSHR-thyrotropin-receptor, LH/hCG receptor, FSH
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2500/00—Screening for compounds of potential therapeutic value

Definitions

  • This invention relates to novel multibinding compounds (agents) that are ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor agonists and pharmaceutical compositions comprising such compounds. Accordingly, the multibinding compounds and pharmaceutical compositions of this invention are useful in the treatment and prevention of metabolic disorders such as obesity, diabetes, and the like.
  • a receptor is a biological structure with one or more binding domains that reversibly complexes with one or more ligands. where that complexation has biological consequences.
  • Receptors can exist entirely outside the cell (extracellular receptors), within the cell membrane (but presenting sections of the receptor to the extracellular milieu and cytosol), or entirely within the cell
  • a ligand is a binding partner for a specific receptor or family of receptors.
  • a ligand may be the endogenous ligand for the receptor or alternatively may be a synthetic ligand for the receptor such as a drug, a drug candidate or a pharmacological tool.
  • the G-proteins when activated, affect a wide range of downstream effector systems both positively and negatively (e.g., ion channels, protein kinase cascades, transcription, transmigration of adhesion proteins, and the like).
  • Adrenergic receptors are members of the G-protein coupled receptors that are composed of a family of three receptor sub-types: ⁇ l ( A B D ) ⁇ 2 ( A B c ), and ⁇ G . - . s)- 1"5 These receptors are expressed in tissues of various systems and organs of mammals and the proportions of the ⁇ and the ⁇ receptors are tissue dependant. For example, ⁇ l is found in cardiac tissue, ⁇ 2 is found in the uterus, skeletal muscle, and lungs 5 and ⁇ 3 is predominantly found in adipose tissue 5 .
  • NIDDM non-insulin dependent diabetes
  • ⁇ 3-AR agonists such as BRL 26830A.
  • BRL 35135, Ro 16-8174, Ro 40-2148 and CL 316,24322 are development for the treatment of obesity.
  • the half -lives of these drugs are short and their bioavailabilty is poor 7 .
  • they suffer from adverse side effects including cardiovascular abnormalities, tremors, insomnia, dizziness, and elevated systolic blood pressure. Accordingly, there is a need for long acting.
  • ⁇ 3-AR selective drugs that are efficacious and lack unpleasant side effects.
  • the multibinding compounds of the present invention fulfill this need.
  • This invention is directed to novel multibinding compounds (agents) that are ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor agonists and are therefore useful in the treatment and prevention of diseases related to metabolic disorders such as obesity, diabetes, and the like.
  • this invention provides a multibinding compound of Formula (I):
  • Ar 1 is selected from the group consisting of aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, and heterocyclyl wherein each of said Ar 1 substituent optionally links the ligand to a linker via a covalent bond;
  • R 1 and R 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, and a covalent bond that links the ligand to a linker;
  • R 3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl. and a covalent bond that links the ligand to a linker; or (ii) a compound of formula (b):
  • Ar is selected from the group consisting of aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, and heterocyclyl wherein each of said Ar substituent optionally links the ligand to a linker via a covalent bond;
  • R 4 and R 5 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, and a covalent bond that links the ligand to a linker;
  • W is a covalent bond, alkyl or substituted alkyl where one or more of the carbon atoms in said alkyl or substituted alkyl group is optionally replaced by one or more heteroatom selected from -0-, S(0) n - (where n is an integer from 0 to 2), or -NR 4 - (where R 4 is hydrogen, or alkyl); and
  • Ar 3 is selected from the group consisting of aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl. and heterocycle wherein each of said Ar 3 substituent optionally links the ligand to a linker via a covalent bond; each linker, X, in the multibinding compound of Formula (I) independently has the formula:
  • m is an integer of from 0 to 20;
  • X a at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -0-, -S-, -NR-, -C(O)-, -C(O)0-, -OC(O)-, -C(0)NR-, -NRC(O)-, C(S), -C(S)0-, -C(S)NR-, -NRC(S)-, or a covalent bond where R is as defined below;
  • Z at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of alkylene, substituted alkylene, cycloalkylene, substituted cylcoalkylene.
  • each Y a at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -0-, -C(O)-, -OC(O)-. -C(O)0-, -NR-, -S(0)n-, -C(0)NR'-. -NR'C(O)-,
  • n 0, 1 or 2; and R, R" and R" at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl. alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, individual isomer, mixtures of isomers, and prodrugs thereof provided that the multibinding compound of Formula (I) cannot be:
  • linker, X is -0-(alkylene)-0-, -0-(hydroxyalkylene)-0-, -0-[(CH 2 ) 2 . [(OCH 2 CH 2 ) n ]-0- (where n is an integer of 1 to 3). or -NHCO-(alkylene)-CONH-; and (ii) a compound of formula R a R b NCH(CH 3 )CH 2 [-OCH 2 CH(CH 3 )-] 2 .
  • R a is an aryl-OCH 2 CH(OH)CH 2 - group and R b is either hydrogen or an aryl-OCH 2 CH(OH)CH 2 - group where the aryl group is 2-allylphenyl, 4-(2- methoxyethyl)phenyl, 1 -naphthyl, or 4-methoxyphenyl.
  • this invention provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and an effective amount of a multibinding compound of Formula (I):
  • Ar 1 is selected from the group consisting of aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, and heterocyclyl wherein each of said Ar 1 substituent optionally links the ligand to a linker via a covalent bond;
  • R' and R 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, and a covalent bond that links the ligand to a linker;
  • R 3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, and a covalent bond that links the ligand to a linker; or (ii) a compound of formula (b):
  • Ar 2 is selected from the group consisting of aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, and heterocyclyl wherein each of said Ar 2 substituent optionally links the ligand to a linker via a covalent bond;
  • R 4 and R 5 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, and a covalent bond that links the ligand to a linker;
  • W is a covalent bond, alkyl, or substituted alkyl where one or more of the carbon atoms in said alkyl or substituted alkyl group is optionally replaced by one or more heteroatom selected from -O-, S(0) n - (where n is an integer from 0 to 2), or -NR 4 - (where R 4 is hydrogen, or alkyl); and
  • Ar 3 is selected from the group consisting of aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, and heterocycle wherein each of said Ar 3 substituent optionally links the ligand to a linker via a covalent bond; each linker, X, in the multibinding compound of Formula (I) independently has the formula:
  • m is an integer of from 0 to 20;
  • X a at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -0-, -S-, -NR-, -C(O)-, -C(0)0-, -OC(O)-, -C(0)NR-, -NRC(O)-, C(S), -C(S)0-, -C(S)NR-, -NRC(S)-, or a covalent bond where R is as defined below;
  • Z at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of alkylene, substituted alkylene, cycloalkylene, substituted cylcoalkylene, alkenylene. substituted alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylene, cycloalkenylene, substituted cycloalkenylene, arylene, heteroarylene, heterocyclene, or a covalent bond; each Y a at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -0-, -C(O)-, -OC(O)-, -C(O)0-, -NR-, -S(0)n-, -C(0)NR ⁇ -NR'C(O)-,
  • linker, X is -0-(alkylene)-0-, -0-(hydroxyalkylene)-0-, -0-[(CH 2 ) 2 . [(OCH 2 CH 2 ) n ]-O- (where n is an integer of 1 to 3), or -NHCO-(alkylene)-CONH-; and (ii) a compound of formula R a R b NCH(CH 3 )CH 2 [-OCH 2 CH(CH 3 )-] 2 .
  • this invention provides a method of treating diseases mediated by a ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor in a mammal, said method comprising administering to said mammal a therapeutically effective amount of a pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a multibinding compound of Formula (I):
  • Ar 1 is selected from the group consisting of aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, and heterocyclyl wherein each of said Ar 1 substituent optionally links the ligand to a linker via a covalent bond;
  • R 1 and R 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, and a covalent bond that links the ligand to a linker;
  • R 3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, and a covalent bond that links the ligand to a linker;
  • Ar 2 is selected from the group consisting of aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, and heterocyclyl wherein each of said Ar substituent optionally links the ligand to a linker via a covalent bond;
  • R 4 and R 5 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, and a covalent bond that links the ligand to a linker;
  • W is a covalent bond, alkyl, or substituted alkyl where one or more of the carbon atoms in said alkyl or substituted alkyl group is optionally replaced by one or more heteroatom selected from -0-, S(0) n - (where n is an integer from 0 to 2), or -NR 4 - (where R 4 is hydrogen, or alkyl); and
  • Ar 3 is selected from the group consisting of aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, and heterocycle wherein each of said Ar 3 substituent optionally links the ligand to a linker via a covalent bond; each linker, X, in the multibinding compound of Formula (I) independently has the formula:
  • m is an integer of from 0 to 20;
  • X a at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -0-, -S-, -NR-, -C(O)-, -C(0)0-, -OC(O)-, -C(0)NR-, -NRC(O)-, C(S), -C(S)0-, -C(S)NR-, -NRC(S)-, or a covalent bond where R is as defined below;
  • Z at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of alkylene, substituted alkylene, cycloalkylene, substituted cylcoalkylene.
  • each Y a at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -0-, -C(O)-, -OC(O)-, -C(0)0-, -NR-, -S(O)n-, -C(0)NR'-, -NR'C(O)-,
  • n 0, 1 or 2; and R, R' and R" at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl. substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, individual isomer, mixtures of isomers, and prodrugs thereof provided that the multibinding compound of Formula (I) cannot be:
  • linker, X is -0-(alkylene)-O-, -O-(hydroxyalkylene)-0-, -0-[(CH 2 ) 2 . [(OCH 2 CH 2 ) n ]-0- (where n is an integer of 1 to 3), or -NHCO-(alkylene)-CONH-; and (ii) a compound of formula R a R b NCH(CH 3 )CH 2 [-OCH 2 CH(CH 3 )-] 2 .
  • this invention is directed to general synthetic methods for generating large libraries of diverse multimeric compounds which multimeric compounds are candidates for possessing multibinding properties for ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor.
  • the diverse multimeric compound libraries provided by this invention are synthesized by combining a linker or linkers with a ligand or ligands to provide for a library of multimeric compounds wherein the linker and ligand each have complementary functional groups permitting covalent linkage.
  • the library of linkers is preferably selected to have diverse properties such as valency, linker length, linker geometry and rigidity, hydrophilicity or hydrophobicity, amphiphilicity, acidity, basicity and polarization.
  • the library of ligands is preferably selected to have diverse attachment points on the same ligand. different functional groups at the same site of otherwise the same ligand, and the like.
  • This invention is also directed to libraries of diverse multimeric compounds which multimeric compounds are candidates for possessing multibinding properties for ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor.
  • These libraries are prepared via the methods described above and permit the rapid and efficient evaluation of what molecular constraints impart multibinding properties to a ligand or a class of ligands targeting a receptor.
  • this invention is directed to a method for identifying multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties for ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor which method comprises:
  • each linker in said library comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand;
  • this invention is directed to a method for identifying multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties for ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor which method comprises:
  • each linker comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand;
  • the preparation of the multimeric ligand compound library is achieved by either the sequential or concurrent combination of the two or more stoichiometric equivalents of the ligands identified in (a) with the linkers identified in (b). Sequential addition is preferred when a mixture of different ligands is employed to ensure heterodimeric or multimeric compounds are prepared. Concurrent addition of the ligands occurs when at least a portion of the multimer comounds prepared are homomultimeric compounds.
  • this invention is directed to a library of multimeric ligand compounds which may possess multivalent properties for ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor which library is prepared by the method comprising:
  • each linker in said library comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand;
  • this invention is directed to a library of multimeric ligand compounds which may possess multivalent properties for ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor which library is prepared by the method comprising:
  • each linker comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand;
  • the library of linkers employed in either the methods or the library aspects of this invention is selected from the group comprising flexible linkers, rigid linkers, hydrophobic linkers, hydrophilic linkers, linkers of different geometry, acidic linkers, basic linkers, linkers of different polarization and amphiphilic linkers.
  • each of the linkers in the linker library may comprise linkers of different chain length and/or having different complementary reactive groups. Such linker lengths can preferably range from about 2 to 100A.
  • the ligand or mixture of ligands is selected to have reactive functionality at different sites on said ligands in order to provide for a range of orientations of said ligand on said multimeric ligand compounds.
  • Such reactive functionality includes, by way of example, carboxylic acids, carboxylic acid halides, carboxyl esters, amines, halides,pseudohalides, isocyanates, vinyl unsaturation, ketones, aldehydes, thiols, alcohols, anhydrides, boronates, and precursors thereof. It is understood, of course, that the reactive functionality on the ligand is selected to be complementary to at least one of the reactive groups on the linker so that a covalent linkage can be formed between the linker and the ligand.
  • the multimeric ligand compound is homomeric (i.e., each of the ligands is the same, although it may be attached at different points) or heteromeric (i.e., at least one of the ligands is different from the other ligands).
  • this invention provides for an iterative process for rationally evaluating what molecular constraints impart multibinding properties to a class of multimeric compounds or ligands targeting a receptor.
  • this method aspect is directed to a method for identifying multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties for ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor which method comprises:
  • steps (e) and (f) optionally repeating steps (e) and (f) to further elaborate upon said molecular constraints.
  • steps (e) and (f) are repeated at least two times, more preferably at from 2-50 times, even more preferably from 3 to 50 times, and still more preferably at least 5-50 times.
  • FIG. 1 illustrates examples of multibinding compounds comprising 2 ligands attached in different formats to a linker.
  • FIG. 2 illustrates examples of multibinding compounds comprising 3 ligands attached in different formats to a linker.
  • FIG. 3 illustrates examples of multibinding compounds comprising 4 ligands attached in different formats to a linker.
  • FIG. 4 illustrates examples of multibinding compounds comprising >4 ligands attached in different formats to a linker.
  • FIGURES 5-16 illustrate various methods of preparing bivalent multibinding compounds of Formula (I).
  • This invention is directed to multibinding compounds which are ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor agonists, pharmaceutical compositions containing such compounds and methods for treating diseases mediated by ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor in mammals.
  • alkyl refers to a monoradical branched or unbranched saturated hydrocarbon chain preferably having from 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms. This term is exemplified by groups such as methyl, ethyl, ⁇ -propyl, wo-propyl, «-butyl, iso- butyl, ft-hexyl, n-decyl, tetradecyl, and the like.
  • substituted alkyl refers to an alkyl group as defined above, having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl.
  • This term is exemplified by groups such as hydroxymethyl. hydroxyethyl, hydroxypropyl, 2- aminoethyl, 3-aminopropyl, 2-methylaminoefhyl, 3-dimethylaminopropyl, 2-sulfonamidoethyl, 2-carboxyethyl, and the like.
  • alkylene refers to a diradical of a branched or unbranched saturated hydrocarbon chain, preferably having from 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms and even more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms. This term is exemplified by groups such as methylene (-CH 2 -), ethylene
  • substituted alkylene refers to an alkylene group, as defined above, having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl.
  • substituted alkylene groups include those where 2 substituents on the alkylene group are fused to form one or more cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, aryl, heterocyclic or heteroaryl groups fused to the alkylene group.
  • fused groups contain from 1 to 3 fused ring structures.
  • alkaryl or "aralkyl” refers to the groups -alkylene-aryl and -substituted alkylene-aryl where alkylene, substituted alkylene and aryl are defined herein. Such alkaryl groups are exemplified by benzyl, phenethyl and the like.
  • alkoxy refers to the groups alkyl-O-, alkenyl-O-, cycloalkyl-O-, cycloalkenyl-O-, aryl-O-, heteroaryl-O-, and alkynyl-O-, where alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, and alkynyl are as defined herein.
  • Preferred alkoxy groups are alkyl-O- and include, by way of example, methoxy, ethoxy, «-propoxy. w -propoxy, rc-butoxy, tert-butoxy, sec-butoxy, ⁇ -pentoxy, ⁇ -hexoxy, 1 ,2- dimethylbutoxy, and the like.
  • substituted alkoxy refers to the groups substituted alkyl-O-, substituted alkenyl-O-, substituted cycloalkyl-O-, substituted cycloalkenyl-O-, and substituted alkynyl-O- where substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, substituted cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkenyl and substituted alkynyl are as defined herein.
  • alkenyl refers to a monoradical of a branched or unbranched unsaturated hydrocarbon group preferably having from 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 10 carbon atoms and even more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and preferably from 1-6 sites of vinyl unsaturation.
  • substituted alkenyl refers to an alkenyl group as defined above having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy.
  • substituted alkenylene refers to an alkenylene group as defined above having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably from 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl.
  • substituted alkenylene groups include those where 2 substituents on the alkenylene group are fused to form one or more cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, aryl, heterocyclic or heteroaryl groups fused to the alkenylene group.
  • alkynyl refers to a monoradical of an unsaturated hydrocarbon preferably having from 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 20 carbon atoms and even more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and preferably from 1-6 sites of acetylene (triple bond) unsaturation.
  • Preferred alkynyl groups include ethynyl (-C ⁇ CH), propargyl (-CH 2 C ⁇ CH) and the like.
  • substituted alkynyl refers to an alkynyl group as defined above having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic.
  • heterocyclooxy hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -S0 2 -alkyl, -S0 2 -substituted alkyl, -S0 2 -aryl, and -S0 2 -heteroaryl.
  • alkynylene refers to a diradical of an unsaturated hydrocarbon preferably having from 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 10 carbon atoms and even more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and preferably from 1-6 sites of acetylene (triple bond) unsaturation.
  • Preferred alkynylene groups include ethynylene (-C ⁇ C-), propargylene (-CH 2 C ⁇ C-) and the like.
  • substituted alkynylene refers to an alkynylene group as defined above having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl.
  • aminoacyloxy aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol.
  • thioalkoxy substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -S0 2 -alkyl, -SO : -substituted alkyl, -S0 2 -aryl and -S0 2 -heteroaryl
  • acyl refers to the groups HC(O)-, alkyl-C(O)-, substituted alkyl- C(O)-, alkenyl-C(O)-, substituted alkenyl-C(O)-, cycloalkyl-C(O)-, substituted cycloalkyl-C(O)-, cycloalkenyl-C(O)-, substituted cycloalkenyl-C(O)-, aryl-C(O)-, heteroaryl-C(O)- and heterocyclic-C(O)- where alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • acylamino or “aminocarbonyl” refers to the group -C(0)NRR where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic or where both R groups are joined to form a heterocyclic group (e.g., morpholino) wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl. heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • sulfonylamino refers to the group -NRSO 2 R a where R is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aralkyl. or heteroaralkyl, and R a is alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, amino, or substituted amino wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl. aryl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, heteroaralkyl and substituted amino are as defined herein.
  • aminoacyl refers to the group -NRC(0)R where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, amino, substituted amino, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • aminoacyloxy or “alkoxycarbonylamino” refers to the group -NRC(O)OR where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • acyloxy refers to the groups alkyl-C(0)0-, substituted alkyl- C(0)0-, cycloalkyl-C(0)0-, substituted cycloalkyl-C(0)0-, aryl-C(O)0-, heteroaryl-C(0)0-, and heterocyclic-C(0)0- wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • aryl refers to an unsaturated aromatic carbocyclic group of from 6 to 20 carbon atoms having a single ring (e.g., phenyl) or multiple condensed (fused) rings (e.g., naphthyl or anthryl).
  • the aryl group may optionally be fused to a heterocyclic, cycloalkyl, or substituted cycloalkyl group.
  • Preferred aryls include phenyl, naphthyl and the like.
  • such aryl groups can optionally be substituted with from 1 to 5 substituents, preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of acyloxy, hydroxy, thiol, acyl. alkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkoxy, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, substituted cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkenyl.
  • aryl substituents include alkyl, alkoxy, halo, cyano. nitro, trihalomethyl, and thioalkoxy.
  • aryloxy refers to the group aryl-O- wherein the aryl group is as defined above including optionally substituted aryl groups as also defined above.
  • arylene refers to the diradical derived from aryl (including substituted aryl) as defined above and is exemplified by 1,2-phenylene, 1 ,3- phenylene, 1 ,4-phenylene, 1 ,2-naphthylene and the like.
  • amino refers to the group -NH 2 .
  • substituted amino refers to the group -NRR where each R is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, acyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl. heteroaryl and heterocyclic provided that both R " s are not hydrogen.
  • carboxyalkyl or “alkoxycarbonyl” refers to the groups “-C(O)O-alkyl", “-C(0)0-substituted alkyl", “-C(0)0-cycloalkyl”, “-C(O)0- substituted cycloalkyl”, “-C(0)0-alkenyl”, “-C(0)0-substituted alkenyl”, “-C(O)O-alkynyl” and "-C(0)0-substituted alkynyl” where alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl and substituted alkynyl alkynyl are as defined herein.
  • cycloalkyl refers to cyclic alkyl groups of from 3 to 20 carbon atoms having a single cyclic ring or multiple condensed rings, said cycloalkyl group may optionally be fused to an aryl or heteroaryl group.
  • cycloalkyl groups include, by way of example, single ring structures such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclooctyl, and the like, or multiple ring structures such as adamantanyl, and the like.
  • substituted cycloalkyl refers to cycloalkyl groups having from 1 to 5 substituents. and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl. substituted alkenyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl. cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl. acylamino, acyloxy. amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano.
  • halogen hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -S0 2 -alkyl, -S0 2 -substituted alkyl, -S0 2 -aryl and -S0 2 -heteroaryl.
  • cycloalkenyl refers to cyclic alkenyl groups of from 4 to 20 carbon atoms having a single cyclic ring and at least one point of internal unsaturation.
  • suitable cycloalkenyl groups include, for instance, cyclobut-2-enyl, cyclopent-3-enyl, cyclooct-3-enyl and the like.
  • substituted cycloalkenyl refers to cycloalkenyl groups having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy.
  • halo refers to fluoro, chloro, bromo
  • heteroaryl refers to an aromatic group of from 1 to 15 carbon atoms and 1 to 4 heteroatoms selected from oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur within at least one ring (if there is more than one ring).
  • the heteroaryl ring may optionally be fused to a cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl ring.
  • heteroaryl groups can be optionally substituted with 1 to 5 substituents, preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of acyloxy, hydroxy, thiol, acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkoxy, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, substituted cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, acylamino.
  • heteroaryl substituents include alkyl, alkoxy, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, and thioalkoxy.
  • Such heteroaryl groups can have a single ring (e.g., pyridyl or furyl) or multiple condensed rings (e.g., indolizinyl or benzothienyl).
  • Preferred heteroaryls include pyridyl, pyrrolyl and furyl.
  • heteroaryloxy refers to the group heteroaryl-O-.
  • heteroarylene refers to the diradical group derived from heteroaryl (including substituted heteroaryl), as defined above, and is exemplified by the groups 2,6-pyridylene, 2,4-pyridiylene, 1 ,2-quinolinylene, 1 ,8-quinolinylene, 1 ,4-benzofuranylene, 2,5-pyridnylene, 2,5-indolenyl and the like.
  • heterocycle refers to a monoradical saturated unsaturated group having a single ring or multiple condensed rings, from 1 to 40 carbon atoms and from 1 to 10 hetero atoms, preferably 1 to 4 heteroatoms, selected from nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus, and/or oxygen within the ring and further wherein one, two, or three of the ring carbon atoms may optionally be replaced with a carbonyl group (i.e., a keto group).
  • heterocyclic groups can be optionally substituted with 1 to 5, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido. cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl.
  • heterocyclic groups can have a single ring or multiple condensed rings.
  • Preferred heterocyclics include morpholino, piperidinyl, and the like.
  • heteroaryls and heterocycles include, but are not limited to, pyrrole, thiophene, furan, imidazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, indolizine, isoindole, indole, indazole, purine, quinolizine, isoquinohne, quinoline, phthalazine, naphthylpyridine, quinoxaline, quinazoline, cinnoline, pteridine, carbazole, carboline, phenanthridine, acridine, phenanthroline, isothiazole, phenazine, isoxazole, phenoxazine, phenothiazine, imidazolidine.
  • heterocyclooxy refers to the group heterocyclic-O-.
  • thioheterocyclooxy refers to the group heterocyclic-S-.
  • heterocyclene refers to the diradical group formed from a heterocycle, as defined herein, and is exemplified by the groups 2,6-morpholino, 2,5-morpholino and the like.
  • oxyacylamino or “aminocarbonyloxy” refers to the group -OC(O)NRR where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • spiro-attached cycloalkyl group refers to a cycloalkyl group joined to another ring via one carbon atom common to both rings.
  • thiol refers to the group -SH.
  • thioalkoxy or “alkylthio” refers to the group -S-alkyl.
  • substituted thioalkoxy refers to the group -S-substituted alkyl.
  • thioaryloxy refers to the group aryl-S- wherein the aryl group is as defined above including optionally substituted aryl groups also defined above.
  • thioheteroaryloxy refers to the group heteroaryl-S- wherein the heteroaryl group is as defined above including optionally substituted aryl groups as also defined above.
  • any of the above groups which contain one or more substituents it is understood, of course, that such groups do not contain any substitution or substitution patterns which are sterically impractical and/or synthetically non- feasible.
  • the compounds of this invention include all stereochemical isomers arising from the substitution of these compounds.
  • pharmaceutically-acceptable salt refers to salts which retain the biological effectiveness and properties of the multibinding compounds of this invention and which are not biologically or otherwise undesirable.
  • the multibinding compounds of this invention are capable of forming acid and/or base salts by virtue of the presence of amino and/or carboxyl groups or groups similar thereto.
  • Pharmaceutically-acceptable base addition salts can be prepared from inorganic and organic bases. Salts derived from inorganic bases, include by way of example only, sodium, potassium, lithium, ammonium, calcium and magnesium salts.
  • Salts derived from organic bases include, but are not limited to, salts of primary, secondary and tertiary amines, such as alkyl amines, dialkyl amines, trialkyl amines, substituted alkyl amines, di(substituted alkyl) amines, tri(substituted alkyl) amines, alkenyl amines, dialkenyl amines, trialkenyl amines, substituted alkenyl amines, di(substituted alkenyl) amines, tri(substituted alkenyl) amines, cycloalkyl amines, di(cycloalkyl) amines, tri(cycloalkyl) amines, substituted cycloalkyl amines, disubstituted cycloalkyl amine, trisubstituted cycloalkyl amines, cycloalkenyl amines, di(cycloalkeny
  • amines where the two or three substituents, together with the amino nitrogen, form a heterocyclic or heteroaryl group.
  • suitable amines include, by way of example only, isopropylamine, trimethyl amine, diethyl amine, tri( «o-propyl) amine, tri( ⁇ -propyl) amine, ethanolamine, 2-dimethylaminoethanol, tromethamine, lysine, arginine, histidine, caffeine, procaine, hydrabamine. choline. betaine, ethylenediamine, glucosamine, N-alkylglucamines, theobromine, purines, piperazine, piperidine.
  • carboxylic acid amides including carboxamides, lower alkyl carboxamides, dialkyl carboxamides, and the like.
  • Salts derived from inorganic acids include hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like.
  • Salts derived from organic acids include acetic acid, propionic acid, glycolic acid, pyruvic acid, oxalic acid, malic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, cinnamic acid, mandelic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, -toluene-sulfonic acid, salicylic acid, and the like.
  • pharmaceutically-acceptable cation refers to the cation of a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt.
  • library refers to at least 3. preferably from 10 2 to 10 9 and more preferably from 10 2 to 10 4 multimeric compounds. Preferably, these compounds are prepared as a multiplicity of compounds in a single solution or reaction mixture which permits facile synthesis thereof.
  • the library of multimeric compounds can be directly assayed for multibinding properties.
  • each member of the library of multimeric compounds is first isolated and, optionally, characterized. This member is then assayed for multibinding properties.
  • selection refers to a set of multimeric compounds which are prepared either sequentially or concurrently (e.g., combinatorially).
  • the collection comprises at least 2 members; preferably from 2 to 10 9 members and still more preferably from 10 to 10 4 members.
  • multimeric compound refers to compounds comprising from 2 to 10 ligands covalently connected through at least one linker which compounds may or may not possess multibinding properties (as defined herein).
  • pseudohalide refers to functional groups which react in displacement reactions in a manner similar to a halogen. Such functional groups include, by way of example, mesyl, tosyl, azido and cyano groups.
  • protecting group refers to any group which when bound to one or more hydroxyl, thiol, amino or carboxyl groups of the compounds (including intermediates thereof) prevents reactions from occurring at these groups and which protecting group can be removed by conventional chemical or enzymatic steps to reestablish the hydroxyl, thiol, amino or carboxyl group (See., T.W. Greene and P.G.H. Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis ⁇ , 2 nd Ed.).
  • removable blocking group employed is not critical and preferred removable hydroxyl blocking groups include conventional substituents such as allyl, benzyl, acetyl, chloroacetyl, thiobenzyl, benzylidine, phenacyl, t-butyl- diphenylsilyl and any other group that can be introduced chemically onto a hydroxyl functionality and later selectively removed either by chemical or enzymatic methods in mild conditions compatible with the nature of the product.
  • Preferred removable thiol blocking groups include disulfide groups, acyl groups, benzyl groups, and the like.
  • Preferred removable amino blocking groups include conventional substituents such as t-butyoxycarbonyl (t-BOC), benzyloxycarbonyl (CBZ), fluorenylmethoxy-carbonyl (FMOC), allyloxycarbonyl (ALOC), and the like which can be removed by conventional conditions compatible with the nature of the product.
  • t-BOC t-butyoxycarbonyl
  • CBZ benzyloxycarbonyl
  • FMOC fluorenylmethoxy-carbonyl
  • ALOC allyloxycarbonyl
  • Preferred carboxyl protecting groups include esters such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, t-butyl etc. which can be removed by mild conditions compatible with the nature of the product.
  • ligand or "ligands” as used herein denotes a compound that is a binding partner for a ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor and is bound thereto by complementarity. Preferred ligands are those that are either ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor agonists or antagonists. The specific region, or regions of the ligand that is (are) recognized by the receptor is designated as the "ligand domain”.
  • a ligand may be either capable of binding to the receptor by itself, or may require the presence of one or more non-ligand components for binding (e.g., Ca *2 , Mg" 2 or a water molecule is required for the binding of a ligand to various ligand binding sites).
  • non-ligand components for binding e.g., Ca *2 , Mg" 2 or a water molecule is required for the binding of a ligand to various ligand binding sites.
  • ligands useful in this invention are described herein. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that portions of the ligand structure that are not essential for specific molecular recognition and binding activity may be varied substantially, replaced or substituted with unrelated structures (for example, with ancillary groups as defined below) and, in some cases, omitted entirely without affecting the binding interaction.
  • the primary requirement for a ligand is that it has a ligand domain as defined above.
  • ligand is not intended to be limited to compounds known to be useful in binding to ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor (e.g., known drugs). Those skilled in the art will understand that the term ligand can equally apply to a molecule that is not normally associated with ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor binding properties. In addition, it should be noted that ligands that exhibit marginal activity or lack useful activity as monomers can be highly active as multivalent compounds because of the benefits conferred by multivalency.
  • the term "ligand” or " ligands" as used herein is intended to include the racemic forms of the ligands as well as individual enantiomers and diasteromers and non-racemic mixtures thereof.
  • multibinding compound or agent refers to a compound that is capable of multivalency, as defined below, and which has 2-10 ligands covalently bound to one or more linkers.
  • each ligand and linker in the multibinding compound is independently selected such that the multibinding compound includes both symmetric compounds (i.e., where each ligand as well as each linker is identical) and asymmetric compounds( (i.e., where at least one of the ligands is different from the other ligand(s) and/or at least one linker is different from the other linker(s)).
  • Multibinding compounds provide a biological and/or therapeutic effect greater than the aggregate of unlinked ligands equivalent thereto which are made available for binding.
  • the biological and/or therapeutic effect of the ligands attached to the multibinding compound is greater than that achieved by the same amount of unlinked ligands made available for binding to the ligand binding sites (receptors).
  • the phrase "increased biological or therapeutic effect” includes, for example: increased affinity, increased selectivity for target, increased specificity for target, increased potency, increased efficacy, decreased toxicity, improved duration of activity or action, increased ability to kill cells such as fungal pathogens, cancer cells, etc., decreased side effects, increased therapeutic index, improved bioavailibity, improved pharmacokinetics, improved activity spectrum, and the like.
  • the multibinding compounds of this invention will exhibit at least one and preferably more than one of the above-mentioned affects.
  • the multibinding compound of the present invention can either be composed of ligands that are known to be ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor agonists or they can be composed of ligands that are known to be ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor agonists and ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor antagonists provided that they exhibit an overall ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor agonistic activity.
  • univalency refers to a single binding interaction between one ligand as defined herein with one ligand binding site as defined herein. It should be noted that a compound having multiple copies of a ligand (or ligands) exhibit univalency when only one ligand is interacting with a ligand binding site. Examples of univalent interactions are depicted below.
  • multivalency refers to the concurrent binding of from 2 to 10 linked ligands (which may be the same or different) and two or more corresponding receptors (ligand binding sites) which may be the same or different.
  • potency refers to the minimum concentration at which a ligand is able to achieve a desirable biological or therapeutic effect.
  • the potency of a ligand is typically proportional to its affinity for its ligand binding site. In some cases, the potency may be non-linearly correlated with its affinity.
  • the dose-response curve of each is determined under identical test conditions (e.g., in an in vitro or in vivo assay, in an appropriate animal model). The finding that the multibinding agent produces an equivalent biological or therapeutic effect at a lower concentration than the aggregate unlinked ligand is indicative of enhanced potency.
  • selectivity is a measure of the binding preferences of a ligand for different ligand binding sites (receptors).
  • the selectivity of a ligand with respect to its target ligand binding site relative to another ligand binding site is given by the ratio of the respective values of K d (i.e., the dissociation constants for each ligand-receptor complex) or, in cases where a biological effect is observed below the K d , the ratio of the respective EC 50 's (i.e., the concentrations that produce 50% of the maximum response for the ligand interacting with the two distinct ligand binding sites (receptors)).
  • ligand binding site denotes the site on the ⁇ 3-adrenergic receptor that recognizes a ligand domain and provides a binding partner for the ligand.
  • the ligand binding site may be defined by monomeric or multimeric structures. This interaction may be capable of producing a unique biological effect, for example, agonism, antagonism, and modulatory effects, or it may maintain an ongoing biological event, and the like.
  • ligand binding sites of the receptor that participate in biological multivalent binding interactions are constrained to varying degrees by their intra- and inter-molecular associations.
  • ligand binding sites may be covalently joined to a single structure, noncovalently associated in a multimeric structure, embedded in a membrane or polymeric matrix, and so on and therefore have less translational and rotational freedom than if the same structures were present as monomers in solution.
  • the terms "agonism” and “antagonism” is well known in the art. The term
  • modulatory effect refers to the ability of the ligand to change the activity of an agonist or antagonist through binding to a ligand binding site.
  • inert organic solvent or “inert solvent” means a solvent which is inert under the conditions of the reaction being described in conjunction therewith including, by way of example only, benzene, toluene, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, dimethylformamide. chloroform, methylene chloride, diethyl ether, ethyl acetate, acetone, methylethyl ketone, methanol, ethanol, propanol, isopropanol, t-butanol, dioxane, pyridine, and the like.
  • the solvents used in the reactions described herein are inert solvents.
  • treatment refers to any treatment of a pathologic condition in a mammal, particularly a human, and includes:
  • pathologic condition which is modulated by treatment with a ligand covers all disease states (i.e., pathologic conditions) which are generally acknowledged in the art to be usefully treated with a ligand for the ⁇ 3 -adrenergic receptor in general, and those disease states which have been found to be usefully treated by a specific multibinding compound of our invention.
  • disease states include, by way of example only, the treatment of a mammal afflicted with obesity, diabetes, and the like.
  • therapeutically effective amount refers to that amount of multibinding compound which is sufficient to effect treatment, as defined above, when administered to a mammal in need of such treatment.
  • the therapeutically effective amount will vary depending upon the subject and disease condition being treated, the weight and age of the subject, the severity of the disease condition, the manner of administration and the like, which can readily be determined by one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • linker identified where appropriate by the symbol 'X' refers to a group or groups that covalently attaches from 2 to 10 ligands (as identified above) in a manner that provides for a compound capable of multivalency.
  • the linker is a ligand-orienting entity that permits attachment of at least two copies of a ligand (which may be the same or different) thereto.
  • the linker may itself be biologically active.
  • the term "linker” does not, however, extend to cover solid inert supports such as beads, glass particles, fibers, and the like. But it is understood that the multibinding compounds of this invention can be attached to a solid support if desired. For example, such attachment to solid supports can be made for use in separation and purification processes and similar applications.
  • linker or linkers that joins the ligands presents these ligands to the array of available ligand binding sites. Beyond presenting these ligands for multivalent interactions with ligand binding sites, the linker or linkers spatially constrains these interactions to occur within dimensions defined by the linker or linkers.
  • structural features of the linker valency, geometry, orientation, size, flexibility, chemical composition, etc. are features of multibinding agents that play an important role in determining their activities.
  • the linkers used in this invention are selected to allow multivalent binding of ligands to the ligand binding sites of a ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor, whether such sites are located interiorly, both interiorly and on the periphery of the receptor structure, or at any intermediate position thereof.
  • each Ar 1 is independently selected from the group consisting of:
  • X is selected from the group consisting of :
  • X is selected from the group consisting of -(CFI 2 ) n - (where n is an integer of from 2 to 8), -(CH 2 -CH 2 -0) n l -CH 2 -CH 2 - (where nl is 1 or 2), and ortho. meta. or para xylyl.
  • C Yet another preferred group is a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (IV):
  • Ar 1 , X, and -Ar 3 -W-N(R 5 )CH(R 4 )-CHOH-CH 2 -0-Ar groups are as defined in (A) and (B) above.
  • X is selected from the group consisting of -(CH 2 ) n - (where n is an integer of from 2 to 8), -(CH 2 -CH 2 -0) n ] -CH 2 -CH 2 - (where nl is 1 or 2), and ortho. meta, or para xylyl.
  • the starting materials and reagents used in preparing these compounds are either available from commercial suppliers such as Aldrich Chemical Co., (Milwaukee, Wisconsin, USA), Bachem (Torrance, California, USA), Emka-Chemie, or Sigma (St. Louis, Missouri, USA) or are prepared by methods known to those skilled in the art following procedures set forth in references such as Fieser and Fieser's Reagents for Organic Synthesis, Volumes 1-15 (John Wiley and Sons, 1991); Rodd's Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, Volumes 1-5 and
  • the starting materials and the intermediates of the reaction may be isolated and purified if desired using conventional techniques, including but not limited to filtration, distillation, crystallization, chromatography, and the like. Such materials may be characterized using conventional means, including physical constants and spectral data.
  • process conditions i.e., reaction temperatures, times, mole ratios of reactants, solvents, pressures, etc.
  • Optimum reaction conditions may vary with the particular reactants or solvent used, but such conditions can be determined by one skilled in the art by routine optimization procedures.
  • a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (I) wherein both the ligands are identical and are selected from a compound of formula (a), R' is hydrogen and and R 2 is hydrogen or alkyl can also be prepared as shown in Scheme A below.
  • a compound of formula 3 can be prepared by the procedures described in D. Pelaprat, et al, J. Med. Chem. 23. 1336, (1980); and H. Kizuka, et al., J. Med. Chem. 30, 722, (1987).
  • Phenols of formula 1 are either commercially available or they can be prepared by methods well known in the art. For example, phenol, 2-cyanophenol, 2-allyloxyphenol, 2-chloro-5-methylphenol, 3-pyridinol, 1-napthol and 4- hydroxyindole are commercially available. 4-Hydroxy-3-methyl- sulfonamidophenol can be prepared by the literature procedure described in L. J. Beeley, et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 7. 219-224, (1997), 2-formylamino-5- hydroxy-1-methylimidazole can be prepared by the literature procedure described in Ing, J. Chem. Soc.
  • 6-iodo-3-pyridinol can be prepared by the literature procedure described in K. Edgar, et al.. J. Org. Chem. 55, 5287- 5291(1990)
  • 6-amino-3-pyridinol can be prepared by the literature procedure described in M. Moore, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 81, 6049-6054, (1959)
  • 6-isopropyl-3- pyridinol can be prepared by the literature procedure described in N. Clauson-Kaas, Ada. Chem. Scand. 9, 14(1955)
  • 2-formylamino-4-hydroxythiazole can be prepared by the literature procedure described in M. King, J. Am. Chem. Soc.
  • 5-hydroxy-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroquinolin-2-one can be prepared by the literature procedure described in T. Nishi, et al., Chem. Pharm. Bull. Jpn. 31, 798-810, (1983), 5-hydroxyquinolin-2-one can be prepared by the literature procedure described in T. Nishi, et al., Chem. Pharm. Bull. Jpn. 31, 852-860, (1983), and 4-hydroxybenzimidazol-2-one can be prepared by the literature procedure described in DE 2819458, 1978.
  • a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (I) can be prepared by covalently attaching the ligands, L. to a linker, X, as shown in Scheme B below.
  • a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (I) is prepared in one step, by covalently attaching the ligands, L, to a linker, X, where FG 1 and FG 2 represent a functional group such as halo, amino, hydroxy. thio, aldehyde, ketone, carboxy, carboxy derivati > es such as acid halide, ester, amido, and the like.
  • This method is preferred for preparing compounds of Formula (I) where both the ligands are identical.
  • the compounds of Formula (I) are prepared in a stepwise manner by covalently attaching one equivalent of a ligand, L,, with a ligand X where where FG' and FG 2 represent a functional group as defined above, and FG 2 PG is a protected functional group to give an intermediate of formula (II).
  • Deprotection of the second functional group in (II), followed by reaction with a ligand L 2 , which may be same or different than ligand L, then provides a compound of Formula (I).
  • This method is suitable for preparing compounds of Formula (I) where the ligands are the non-identical.
  • the ligands are covalently attached to the linker using conventional chemical techniques providing for covalent linkage of the ligand to the linker. Reaction chemistries resulting in such linkages are well known in the art and involve the use of complementary functional groups on the linker and ligand as shown in Table I below.
  • First Reactive Group Second Reactive Group Linkage carboxyl amine amide sulfonyl halide amine sulfonamide hydroxyl alkyl/aryl halide ether hydroxyl isocyanate urethane amine epoxide ⁇ -hydroxyamine amine alkyl/aryl halide alkylamine hydroxyl carboxyl ester amine aldehyde amine
  • Ligands of formula (b) can be prepared by methods well known in the art ((e.g., see Ruffolo, R. R. Jr., et al. J. Med. Chem., 38, 3681 -3716, (1995) and Hieble, J. P., et al. J. Med. Chem., 38, 3415-3444, (1995))
  • any compound which binds to ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor can be used as a ligand in this invention provided that the multibinding compound of the Formula (I) acts as a ⁇ 3 agonist.
  • a compound selected for use as a ligand will have at least one functional group, such as an amino, hydroxyl, thiol or carboxyl group and the like, which allows the compound to be readily coupled to the linker.
  • Compounds having such functionality are either known in the art or can be prepared by routine modification of known compounds using conventional reagents and procedures.
  • Linkers can be attached to different positions on the ligand molecule to achieve different orientations of the ligand domains, and thereby facilitate multivalency. While a number of positions on ⁇ 3-adrenergic-modulating ligands are synthetically practical for linking, it is preferred to preserve those ligand substructures which are most important for ligand-receptor binding. At present, the 53 __ 5 Q__ PCT/TJS99/12907
  • the linker is attached to the ligand at a position that retains ligand domain- ligand binding site interaction and specifically which permits the ligand domain of the ligand to orient itself to bind to the ligand binding site. Such positions and synthetic protocols for linkage are well known in the art.
  • the term linker embraces everything that is not considered to be part of the ligand.
  • the relative orientation in which the ligand domains are displayed derives from the particular point or points of attachment of the ligands to the linker, and on the framework geometry.
  • the determination of where acceptable substitutions can be made on a ligand is typically based on prior knowledge of structure-activity relationships (SAR) of the ligand and/or congeners and/or structural information about ligand-receptor complexes (e.g., X-ray crystallography, NMR, and the like).
  • SAR structure-activity relationships
  • ligand-receptor complexes e.g., X-ray crystallography, NMR, and the like.
  • Such positions and the synthetic methods for covalent attachment are well known in the art.
  • the univalent linker-ligand conjugate may be tested for retention of activity in the relevant assay.
  • the linker when covalently attached to multiple copies of the ligands, provides a biocompatible, substantially non-immunogenic multibinding compound.
  • the biological activity of the multibinding compound is highly sensitive to the valency, geometry, composition, size, flexibility or rigidity, etc. of the linker and, in turn, on the overall structure of the multibinding compound, as well as the presence or absence of anionic or cationic charge, the relative hydrophobicity /hydrophilicity of the linker, and the like on the linker. Accordingly, the linker is preferably chosen to maximize the biological activity of the multibinding compound.
  • the linker may be chosen to enhance the biological activity of the molecule.
  • the linker may be chosen from any organic molecule construct that orients two or more ligands to their ligand binding sites to permit multivalency.
  • the linker can be considered as a "framework" on which the ligands are arranged in order to bring about the desired ligand-orienting result, and thus produce a multibinding compound.
  • different orientations can be achieved by including in the framework groups containing mono- or polycyclic groups, including aryl and/or heteroaryl groups, or structures inco ⁇ orating one or more carbon-carbon multiple bonds (alkenyl, alkenylene, alkynyl or alkynylene groups).
  • Other groups can also include oligomers and polymers which are branched- or straight-chain species.
  • rigidity is imparted by the presence of cyclic groups (e.g., aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, etc.).
  • cyclic groups e.g., aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, etc.
  • the ring is a six or ten member ring.
  • the ring is an aromatic ring such as, for example, phenyl or naphthyl.
  • hydrophobic/hydrophilic characteristics of the linker as well as the presence or absence of charged moieties can readily be controlled by the skilled artisan.
  • hydrophobic nature of a linker derived from hexamethylene diamine (H 2 N(CH 2 ) 6 NH 2 ) or related polyamines can be modified to be substantially more hydrophilic by replacing the alkylene group with a poly(oxyalkylene) group such as found in the commercially available "Jeffamines”.
  • Different frameworks can be designed to provide preferred orientations of the ligands.
  • Such frameworks may be represented by using an array of dots (as shown below) wherein each dot may potentially be an atom, such as C, O, N, S, P, H, F, Cl, Br, and F or the dot may alternatively indicate the absence of an atom at that position.
  • each dot may potentially be an atom, such as C, O, N, S, P, H, F, Cl, Br, and F or the dot may alternatively indicate the absence of an atom at that position.
  • the framework is illustrated as a two dimensional array in the following diagram, although clearly the framework is a three dimensional array in practice: 8
  • Each dot is either an atom, chosen from carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus, or halogen, or the dot represents a point in space (i.e., an absence of an atom).
  • the ligands namely, C, O, N, S and P.
  • Atoms can be connected to each other via bonds (single, double or triple bonds with acceptable resonance and tautomeric forms), with regard to the usual constraints of chemical bonding.
  • Ligands may be attached to the framework via single, double or triple bonds (with chemically acceptable tautomeric and resonance forms).
  • Multiple ligand groups (2 to 10) can be attached to the framework such that the minimal, shortest path distance between adjacent ligand groups does not exceed 100 atoms.
  • the linker connections to the ligand is selected such that the maximum spatial distance between two adjacent ligands is no more than 100A.
  • An example of a linker as presented by the grid is shown below for a biphenyl construct.
  • Nodes (1,2) and (9,4) are attachment points. Hydrogen atoms are affixed to nodes (2,4), (4,4), (4.0), (2,0), (7,4), (10,2) and (7,0). Nodes (5.2) and (6,2) are connected by a single bond.
  • the carbon atoms present are connected by either a single or double bonds, taking into consideration the principle of resonance and/or tautomerism.
  • display vectors around similar central core structures such as a phenyl structure (Panel A) and a cyclohexane structure (Panel B) can be varied, as can the spacing of the ligand domain from the core structure (i.e., the length of the attaching moiety).
  • core structures other than those shown here can be used for determining the optimal framework display orientation of the ligands. The process may require the use of multiple copies of the same central core structur or combinations of different types of display cores.
  • the physical properties of the linker can be optimized by varying the chemical composition thereof.
  • the composition of the linker can be varied in numerous ways to achieve the desired physical properties for the multibinding compound.
  • linkers include aliphatic moieties, aromatic moieties, steroidal moieties, peptides, and the like. Specific examples are peptides or polyamides, hydrocarbons, aromatic groups, ethers, lipids, cationic or anionic groups, or a combination thereof.
  • linker can be modified by the addition or insertion of ancillary groups into or onto the linker, for example, to change the solubility of the multibinding compound (in water, fats, lipids, biological fluids, etc.), hydrophobicity, hydrophilicity, linker flexibility, antigenicity, stability, and the like.
  • the introduction of one or more poly(ethylene glycol) (PEG) groups onto or into the linker enhances the hydrophilicity and water solubility of the multibinding compound, increases both molecular weight and molecular size and, depending on the nature of the unPEGylated linker, may increase the in vivo retention time. Further PEG may decrease antigenicity and potentially enhances the overall rigidity of the linker. Ancillary groups which enhance the water solubility /hydrophilicity of the linker and, accordingly, the resulting multibinding compounds are useful in practicing this invention.
  • PEG poly(ethylene glycol)
  • ancillary groups such as, for example, small repeating units of ethylene glycols, alcohols, polyols (e.g., glycerin, glycerol propoxylate, saccharides, including mono- , oligosaccharides, etc.), carboxylates (e.g., small repeating units of glutamic acid. acrylic acid, etc.), amines (e.g., tetraethylenepentamine), and the like) to enhance the water solubility and/or hydrophilicity of the multibinding compounds of this invention.
  • the ancillary group used to improve water solubility/hydrophilicity will be a polyether .
  • lipophilic ancillary groups within the structure of the linker to enhance the lipophilicity and/or hydrophobicity of the multibinding compounds described herein is also within the scope of this invention.
  • Lipophilic groups useful with the linkers of this invention include, by way of example only, aryl and heteroaryl groups which, as above, may be either unsubstituted or substituted with other groups, but are at least substituted with a group which allows their covalent attachment to the linker.
  • Other lipophilic groups useful with the linkers of this invention include fatty acid derivatives which do not form bilayers in aqueous medium until higher concentrations are reached.
  • lipid refers to any fatty acid derivative that is capable of forming a bilayer or a micelle such that a hydrophobic portion of the lipid material orients toward the bilayer while a hydrophilic portion orients toward the aqueous phase. Hydrophilic characteristics derive from the presence of phosphato, carboxylic, sulfato, amino, sulfhydryl, nitro and other like groups well known in the art.
  • Hydrophobicity could be conferred by the inclusion of groups that include, but are not limited to, long chain saturated and unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon groups of up to 20 carbon atoms and such groups substituted by one or more aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, and/or heterocyclic group(s).
  • Preferred lipids are phosphglycerides and sphingolipids, representative examples of which include phosphatidylcholine, phosphatidylethanolamine, phosphatidylserine, phosphatidylinositol, phosphatidic acid, palmitoyleoyl phosphatidylcholine, lysophosphatidylcholine, lysophosphatidyl -ethanolamine, dipalmitoylphosphatidylcholine, dioleoylphosphatidylcholine. distearoyl- phosphatidylcholine or dilinoleoylphosphatidylcholine could be used.
  • lipid Other compounds lacking phosphorus, such as sphingolipid and glycosphingolipid families are also within the group designated as lipid. Additionally, the amphipathic lipids described above may be mixed with other lipids including triglycerides and sterols.
  • the flexibility of the linker can be manipulated by the inclusion of ancillary groups which are bulky and/or rigid.
  • the presence of bulky or rigid groups can hinder free rotation about bonds in the linker or bonds between the linker and the ancillary group(s) or bonds between the linker and the functional groups.
  • Rigid groups can include, for example, those groups whose conformational lability is restrained by the presence of rings and/or multiple bonds within the group, for example, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, and heterocyclic groups.
  • Other groups which can impart rigidity include polypeptide groups such as oligo- or polyproline chains.
  • Rigidity can also be imparted electrostatically.
  • the ancillary groups are either positively or negatively charged, the similarly charged ancillary groups will force the presenter linker into a configuration affording the maximum distance between each of the like charges.
  • the energetic cost of bringing the like-charged groups closer to each other will tend to hold the linker in a configuration that maintains the separation between the like-charged ancillary groups.
  • Further ancillary groups bearing opposite charges will tend to be attracted to their oppositely charged counte ⁇ arts and potentially may enter into both inter- and intramolecular ionic bonds. This non-covalent mechanism will tend to hold the linker into a conformation which allows bonding between the oppositely charged groups.
  • ancillary groups which are charged, or alternatively, bear a latent charge when deprotected, following addition to the linker, include deprotectation of a carboxyl, hydroxyl, thiol or amino group by a change in pH, oxidation, reduction or other mechanisms known to those skilled in the art which result in removal of the protecting group, is within the scope of this invention.
  • Rigidity may also be imparted by internal hydrogen bonding or by hydrophobic collapse.
  • Bulky groups can include, for example, large atoms, ions (e.g., iodine, sulfur, metal ions, etc.) or groups containing large atoms, polycyclic groups, including aromatic groups, non-aromatic groups and structures inco ⁇ orating one or more carbon-carbon multiple bonds (i.e., alkenes and alkynes). Bulky groups can also include oligomers and polymers which are branched- or straight-chain species. Species that are branched are expected to increase the rigidity of the structure more per unit molecular weight gain than are straight-chain species.
  • rigidity is imparted by the presence of cyclic groups (e.g., aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic. etc.).
  • the linker comprises one or more six-membered rings.
  • the ring is an aryl group such as. for example, phenyl or naphthyl.
  • the multibinding compounds described herein comprise 2-10 ligands attached to a linker that attaches the ligands in such a manner that they are presented to the enzyme for multivalent interactions with ligand binding sites thereon/therein.
  • the linker spatially constrains these interactions to occur within dimensions defined by the linker. This and other factors increases the biological activity of the multibinding compound as compared to the same number of ligands made available in monobinding form.
  • the compounds of this invention are preferably represented by the empirical Formula (L) p (X) q where L, X, p and q are as defined above. This is intended to include the several ways in which the ligands can be linked together in order to achieve the objective of multivalency, and a more detailed explanation is described below.
  • the linker may be considered as a framework to which ligands are attached.
  • the ligands can be attached at any suitable position on this framework, for example, at the termini of a linear chain or at any intermediate position.
  • the simplest and most preferred multibinding compound is a bivalent compound which can be represented as L-X-L, where each L is independently a ligand which may be the same or different and each X is independently the linker. Examples of such bivalent compounds are provided in FIG. 1 where each shaded circle represents a ligand.
  • a trivalent compound could also be represented in a linear fashion, i.e., as a sequence of repeated units L-X-L-X-L, in which L is a ligand and is the same or different at each occurrence, as can X.
  • a trimer can also be a radial multibinding compound comprising three ligands attached to a central core, and thus represented as (L) 3 X, where the linker X could include, for example, an aryl or cycloalkyl group.
  • Illustrations of trivalent and tetravalent compounds of this invention are found in FIG.s 2 and 3 respectively where, again, the shaded circles represent ligands. Tetravalent compounds can be represented in a linear array, e.g., L-X-L-X-L-X-L
  • L-X-L-X-L (a branched construct analogous to the isomers of butane — «-butyl, .so-butyl, sec- butyl, and t-butyl) or in a tetrahedral array, e.g.,
  • X and L are as defined herein.
  • X and L could be represented as an alkyl, aryl or cycloalkyl derivative as above with four (4) ligands attached to the core linker.
  • m is an integer of from 0 to 20;
  • X a at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -0-, -S-, -NR-, -C(O)-, -C(0)0-, -OC(O)-, -C(0)NR-, -NRC(O)-.
  • Z at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of alkylene, substituted alkylene, cycloalkylene, substituted cylcoalkylene, alkenylene, substituted alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylene, cycloalkenylene, substituted cycloalkenylene, arylene, heteroarylene, heterocyclene, or a covalent bond; each Y a at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -0-, -C(O)-, -OC(O)-. -C(0)0-, -NR-, -S(0)n-, -C(0)NR " -.
  • n 0, 1 or 2; and R, R' and R" at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl. substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic. Additionally, the linker moiety can be optionally substituted at any atom therein by one or more alkyl, substituted alkyl.
  • cycloalkyl substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl. aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic group.
  • linker when used in combination with the term ''multibinding compound” includes both a covalently contiguous single linker (e.g., L-X-L) and multiple covalently non-contiguous linkers (L-X-L-X-L) within the multibinding compound.
  • Combinatorial Libraries The methods described above lend themselves to combinatorial approaches for identifying multimeric compounds which possess multibinding properties. Specifically, factors such as the proper juxtaposition of the individual ligands of a multibinding compound with respect to the relevant array of binding sites on a target or targets is important in optimizing the interaction of the multibinding compound with its target(s) and to maximize the biological advantage through multivalency.
  • One approach is to identify a library of candidate multibinding compounds with properties spanning the multibinding parameters that are relevant for a particular target. These parameters include: (1) the identity of ligand(s), (2) the orientation of ligands, (3) the valency of the construct, (4) linker length, (5) linker geometry, (6) linker physical properties, and (7) linker chemical functional groups.
  • a single ligand or set of ligands is (are) selected for inco ⁇ oration into the libraries of candidate multibinding compounds which library is directed against a particular biological target or targets e.g., ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor.
  • the only requirement for the ligands chosen is that they are capable of interacting with the selected target(s).
  • ligands may be known drugs, modified forms of known drugs, substructures of known drugs or substrates of modified forms of known drugs (which are competent to interact with the target), or other compounds.
  • Ligands are preferably chosen based on known favorable properties that may be projected to be carried over to or amplified in multibinding forms.
  • ligands which display an unfavorable property from among the previous list may obtain a more favorable property through the process of multibinding compound formation; i.e., ligands should not necessarily be excluded on such a basis.
  • a ligand that is not sufficiently potent at a part ' cular target so as to be efficacious in a human patient may become highly potent and efficacious when presented in multibinding form.
  • a ligand that is potent and efficacious but not of utility because of a non- mechanism-related toxic side effect may have increased therapeutic index
  • each ligand at which to attach the ligand to the linker.
  • the selected points on the ligand/linker for attachment are functionalized to contain complementary reactive functional groups. This permits probing the effects of presenting the ligands to their receptor(s) in multiple relative orientations, an important multibinding design parameter.
  • the only requirement for choosing attachment points is that attaching to at least one of these points does not abrogate activity of the ligand.
  • Such points for attachment can be identified by structural information when available. For example, inspection of a co-crystal structure of a protease inhibitor bound to its target allows one to identify one or more sites where linker attachment will not preclude the enzyme:inhibitor interaction.
  • positions of attachment that do abrogate the activity of the monomeric ligand may also be advantageously included in candidate multibinding compounds in the library provided that such compounds bear at least one ligand attached in a manner which does not abrogate intrinsic activity. This selection derives from, for example, heterobivalent interactions within the context of a single target molecule.
  • a receptor antagonist ligand bound to its target receptor and then consider modifying this ligand by attaching to it a second copy of the same ligand with a linker which allows the second ligand to interact with the same receptor molecule at sites proximal to the antagonist binding site, which include elements of the receptor that are not part of the formal antagonist binding site and/or elements of the matrix surrounding the receptor such as the membrane.
  • the most favorable orientation for interaction of the second ligand molecule with the receptor/matrix may be achieved by attaching it to the linker at a position which abrogates activity of the ligand at the formal antagonist binding site.
  • Another way to consider this is that the SAR of individual ligands within the context of a multibinding structure is often different from the SAR of those same ligands in momomeric form.
  • bivalent interaction focused on bivalent interactions of dimeric compounds bearing two copies of the same ligand joined to a single linker through different attachment points, one of which may abrogate the binding/activity of the monomeric ligand. It should also be understood that bivalent advantage may also be attained with heterodimeric constructs bearing two different ligands that bind to common or different targets.
  • a 5HT, receptor antagonist and a bladder-selective muscarinic M 3 antagonist may be joined to a linker through attachment points which do not abrogate the binding affinity of the monomeric ligands for their respective receptor sites.
  • the dimeric compound may achieve enhanced affinity for both receptors due to favorable interactions between the 5HT 4 ligand and elements of the M 3 receptor proximal to the formal M 3 antagonist binding site and between the M 3 ligand and elements of the 5HT 4 receptor proximal to the formal 5HT antagonist binding site.
  • the dimeric compound may be more potent and selective antagonist of overactive bladder and a superior therapy for urinary urge incontinence.
  • linkages that are possible at those points.
  • the most preferred types of chemical linkages are those that are compatible with the overall structure of the ligand (or protected forms of the ligand) readily and generally formed, stable and intrinsically inocuous under typical chemical and physiological conditions, and compatible with a large number of available linkers. Amide bonds, ethers, amines, carbamates, ureas, and sulfonamides are but a few examples of preferred linkages.
  • Linkers spanning relevant multibinding parameters through selection of valency, linker length, linker geometry, rigidity, physical properties, and chemical functional groups
  • linker length is typically of modest size such that they retain the desirable biodistribution properties of small molecules.
  • Linkers are chosen in a range of lengths to allow the spanning of a range of inter-ligand distances that encompass the distance preferable for a given divalent interaction.
  • the preferred distance can be estimated rather precisely from high-resolution structural information of targets, typically enzymes and soluble receptor targets.
  • high-resolution structural information is not available (such as 7TM G-protein coupled receptors)
  • preferred linker distances are 2-20 ⁇ , with more preferred linker distances of 3-12 A.
  • preferred linker distances are 20-100 A, with more preferred distances of 30-70 A.
  • Linker geometry and rigidity are nominally determined by chemical composition and bonding pattern, which may be controlled and are systematically varied as another spanning function in a multibinding array. For example, linker geometry is varied by attaching two ligands to the ortho. meta. and para positions of a benzene ring, or in cis- or tn s-arrangements at the 1,1- vs. 1,2- vs. 1,3- vs.
  • Linker rigidity is varied by controlling the number and relative energies of different conformational states possible for the linker.
  • a divalent compound bearing two ligands joined by 1 ,8-octyl linker has many more degrees of freedom, and is therefore less rigid than a compound in which the two ligands are attached to the 4,4' positions of a biphenyl linker.
  • linkers are nominally determined by the chemical constitution and bonding patterns of the linker, and linker physical properties impact the overall physical properties of the candidate multibinding compounds in which they are included.
  • a range of linker compositions is typically selected to provide a range of physical properties (hydrophobicity, hydrophilicity, amphiphilicity, polarization, acidity, and basicity) in the candidate multibinding compounds.
  • the particular choice of linker physical properties is made within the context of the physical properties of the ligands they join and preferably the goal is to generate molecules with favorable PK/ADME properties.
  • linkers can be selected to avoid those that are too hydrophilic or too hydrophobic to be readily absorbed and/or distributed in vivo.
  • Linker chemical functional groups :
  • Linker chemical functional groups are selected to be compatible with the chemistry chosen to connect linkers to the ligands and to impart the range of physical properties sufficient to span initial examination of this parameter.
  • Combinatorial synthesis Having chosen a set of n ligands (n being determined by the sum of the number of different attachment points for each ligand chosen) and m linkers by the process outlined above, a library of (n ⁇ )m candidate divalent multibinding compounds is prepared which spans the relevant multibinding design parameters for a particular target. For example, an array generated from two ligands, one which has two attachment points (Al , A2) and one which has three attachment points (Bl, B2, B3) joined in all possible combinations provide for at least 15 possible combinations of multibinding compounds:
  • combinatorial library can employ solid phase chemistries well known in the art wherein the ligand and/or linker is attached to a solid support.
  • the combinatorial libary is prepared in the solution phase.
  • candidate multibinding compounds are optionally purified before assaying for activity by, for example, chromatographic methods (e.g., HPLC). Analysis of array by biochemical, analytical, pharmacological, and computational methods:
  • Various methods are used to characterize the properties and activities of the candidate multibinding compounds in the library to determine which compounds possess multibinding properties. Physical constants such as solubility under various solvent conditions and logD/clogD values can be determined. A combination of NMR spectroscopy and computational methods is used to determine low-energy conformations of the candidate multibinding compounds in fluid media. The ability of the members of the library to bind to the desired target and other targets is determined by various standard methods, which include radioligand displacement assays for receptor and ion channel targets, and kinetic inhibition analysis for many enzyme targets. In vitro efficacy, such as for receptor agonists and antagonists, ion channel blockers, and antimicrobial activity, can also be determined.
  • Pharmacological data including oral abso ⁇ tion, everted gut penetration, other pharmacokinetic parameters and efficacy data can be determined in appropriate models. In this way, key structure-activity relationships are obtained for multibinding design parameters which are then used to direct future work.
  • the members of the library which exhibit multibinding properties, as defined herein, can be readily determined by conventional methods. First those members which exhibit multibinding properties are identified by conventional methods as described above including conventional assays (both in vitro and in vivo).
  • each member of the library can be encrypted or tagged with appropriate information allowing determination of the structure of relevant members at a later time. See, for example. Dower, et al.. International Patent Application Publication No. WO 93/06121; Brenner, et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., USA, 89:5181 (1992); Gallop, et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,846,839: each of which are inco ⁇ orated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • the structure of relevant multivalent compounds can also be determined from soluble and untagged libaries of candidate multivalent compounds by methods known in the art such as those described by Hindsgaul, et al., Canadian Patent Application No. 2,240,325 which was published on July 11, 1998. Such methods couple frontal affinity chromatography with mass spectroscopy to determine both the structure and relative binding affinities of candidate multibinding compounds to receptors.
  • an optional component of the process is to ascertain one or more promising multibinding "lead” compounds as defined by particular relative ligand orientations, linker lengths, linker geometries, etc. Additional libraries can then be generated around these leads to provide for further information regarding structure to activity relationships. These arrays typically bear more focused variations in linker structure in an effort to further optimize target affinity and/or activity at the target (antagonism, partial agonism, etc.), and/or alter physical properties.
  • iterative redesign analysis using the novel principles of multibinding design along with classical medicinal chemistry, biochemistry, and pharmacology approaches one is able to prepare and identify optimal multibinding compounds that exhibit biological advantage towards their targets and as therapeutic agents.
  • suitable divalent linkers include, by way of example only, those derived from dicarboxylic acids, disulfonylhalides, dialdehydes, diketones, dihalides, diisocyanates,diamines, diols, mixtures of carboxylic acids, sulfonylhalides, aldehydes, ketones, halides, isocyanates. amines and diols.
  • carboxylic acid, sulfonylhalide, aldehyde, ketone, halide, isocyanate, amine and diol functional group is reacted with a complementary functionality on the ligand to form a covalent linkage.
  • complementary functionality is well known in the art as illustrated in the following table: COMPLEMENTARY BINDING CHEMISTRIES
  • First Reactive Group Second Reactive Group Linkage hydroxyl isocyanate urethane amine epoxide ⁇ -hydroxyamine amine sulfonyl halide sulfonamide carboxyl acid amine amide hydroxyl alkyl/aryl halide ether aldehyde amine/NaCNBH 3 amine ketone amine/NaCNBH 3 amine amine isocyanate urea
  • Exemplary linkers include the following linkers identified as X-1 through 418 as set forth below:
  • Representative ligands for use in this invention include, by way of example, L-1 and L-2 as identified above wherein L-1 is selected from a compound of formula (a) and L-2 is selected from a compound of formula (b).
  • Combinations of ligands (L) and linkers (X) per this invention include, by way example only, homo- and hetero-dimers wherein a first ligand is selected from L-1 and the second ligand and linker is selected from the following:
  • the multibinding compounds of this invention are ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor agonists. Accordingly, the multibinding compounds and pharmaceutical compositions of this invention are useful in the treatment and prevention of diseases mediated by ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor such as asthma, bronchitis, and the like. They are also useful in the treatment of nervous system injury and premature labor. It is also contemplated that the multibinding compounds of this invention are useful for the treatment of metabolic disorders such as obesity, diabetes, and the like. Additionally, it is contemplated that the compounds of this invention are useful in the treatment of hypertension, cardiovascular diseases, ischemic heart diseases, myocardial ischemia, arrhythmias, angina, myocardial infarction, migraine prophylaxis, and anxiety.
  • Compounds of the invention can be tested in vivo in assays known by persons skilled in the art.
  • the specificity of the compound for ⁇ 3-AR is assessed in mice with monosodium-L-glutamate-induced obesity by the procedure described in Yoshida, T., et al.. 1994. Eur. J. Endocrin., 131 :97.
  • the pharmacokinetics, efficacy, and duration of lipolysis are assessed in ob/ob mice. fa/fa rats or other obese rodents (Zucker.).
  • the efficacy and duration of lipolysis are determined in human ⁇ 3 transgenic mice as described in Moriko, I., et al. 1998.
  • the compounds of this invention are usually administered in the form of pharmaceutical compositions.
  • These compounds can be administered by a variety of routes including oral, rectal, transdermal, subcutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, and intranasal. These compounds are effective as injectable, intranasal, and oral compositions.
  • Such compositions are prepared in a manner well known in the pharmaceutical art and comprise at least one active compound.
  • compositions which contain, as the active ingredient, one or more of the compounds described herein associated with pharmaceutically acceptable carriers.
  • the active ingredient is usually mixed with an excipient, diluted by an excipient or enclosed within such a carrier which can be in the form of a capsule, sachet, paper or other container.
  • the excipient serves as a diluent, it can be a solid, semi-solid, or liquid material, which acts as a vehicle, carrier or medium for the active ingredient.
  • compositions can be in the form of tablets, pills, powders, lozenges, sachets, cachets, elixirs, suspensions, emulsions, solutions, syrups, aerosols (as a solid or in a liquid medium), ointments containing, for example, up to 10% by weight of the active compound, soft and hard gelatin capsules, suppositories, sterile injectable solutions, and sterile packaged powders.
  • excipients include lactose, dextrose, sucrose, sorbitol, mannitol. starches, gum acacia, calcium phosphate, alginates, tragacanth, gelatin, calcium silicate, microcrystalline cellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone, cellulose, sterile water, syrup, and methyl cellulose.
  • the formulations can additionally include: lubricating agents such as talc, magnesium stearate, and mineral oil; wetting agents; emulsifying and suspending agents; preserving agents such as methyl- and propylhydroxy-benzoates; sweetening agents; and flavoring agents.
  • the compositions of the invention can be formulated so as to provide quick, sustained or delayed release of the active ingredient after administration to the patient by employing procedures known in the art.
  • compositions are preferably formulated in a unit dosage form, each dosage containing from about 0.001 to about 1 g. more usually about 1 to about 30 mg, of the active ingredient.
  • unit dosage forms refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages for human subjects and other mammals. each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active material calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with a suitable pharmaceutical excipient.
  • the compound of Formula (I) above is employed at no more than about 20 weight percent of the pharmaceutical composition, more preferably no more than about 15 weight percent, with the balance being pharmaceutically inert carrier(s).
  • the active compound is effective over a wide dosage range and is generally administered in a pharmaceutically effective amount. It, will be understood, however, that the amount of the compound actually administered will be determined by a physician, in the light of the relevant circumstances, including the condition to be treated, the chosen route of administration, the actual compound administered and its relative activity, the age, weight, and response of the individual patient, the severity of the patient's symptoms, and the like.
  • the principal active ingredient is mixed with a pharmaceutical excipient to form a solid preformulation composition containing a homogeneous mixture of a compound of the present invention.
  • a solid preformulation composition containing a homogeneous mixture of a compound of the present invention.
  • the active ingredient is dispersed evenly throughout the composition so that the composition may be readily subdivided into equally effective unit dosage forms such as tablets, pills and capsules.
  • This solid preformulation is then subdivided into unit dosage forms of the type described above containing from, for example, 0.1 to about 500 mg of the active ingredient of the present invention.
  • the tablets or pills of the present invention may be coated or otherwise compounded to provide a dosage form affording the advantage of prolonged action.
  • the tablet or pill can comprise an inner dosage and an outer dosage component, the latter being in the form of an envelope over the former.
  • the two components can be separated by an enteric layer which serves to resist disintegration in the stomach and permit the inner component to pass intact into the duodenum or to be delayed in release.
  • enteric layers or coatings such materials including a number of polymeric acids and mixtures of polymeric acids with such materials as shellac, cetyl alcohol, and cellulose acetate.
  • liquid forms in which the novel compositions of the present invention may be incorporated for administration orally or by injection include aqueous solutions, suitably flavored syrups, aqueous or oil suspensions, and flavored emulsions with edible oils such as corn oil, cottonseed oil, sesame oil. coconut oil, or peanut oil, as well as elixirs and similar pharmaceutical vehicles.
  • compositions for inhalation or insufflation include solutions and suspensions in pharmaceutically acceptable, aqueous or organic solvents, or mixtures thereof, and powders.
  • the liquid or solid compositions may contain suitable pharmaceutically acceptable excipients as described supra.
  • the compositions are administered by the oral or nasal respiratory route for local or systemic effect.
  • Compositions in preferably pharmaceutically acceptable solvents may be nebulized by use of inert gases. Nebulized solutions may be inhaled directly from the nebulizing device or the nebulizing device may be attached to a face mask tent, or intermittent positive pressure breathing machine. Solution, suspension, or powder compositions may be administered, preferably orally or nasally, from devices which deliver the formulation in an appropriate manner.
  • Step 2 l-(w-chlorophenyloxy)-3-amino-2-propanol (1.0 mmole) and benzene- 1,4- diacetic acid (0.5 mmole) are dissolved in N, N'-dimethylformamide (DMF) (5 mL) followed by addition of l-hydroxy-7-azabenzotriazole (HOAT) (1.0 mmole) and Et 3 ⁇ (2.0 mmole). To this stirred solution is added PyBOP (1.1 mmole) as solid. After stirring at ambient temperature for 24 h, the reaction mixture is diluted with brine (20 mL). and extracted with EtOAc (50 mL).
  • DMF N, N'-dimethylformamide
  • HOAT l-hydroxy-7-azabenzotriazole
  • PyBOP 1.1 mmole
  • Step 2 A solution of DMF (50 mL) containing 21b (10 mmole) in ice bath is saturated with nitrogen gas for 5 min, and treated with NaOMe (10.5 mmole). The mixture is stirred for 30 min in ice bath, and followed by addition of bis-(2- iodoethoxy)ethane (5 mmole). After stirring at 85 °C for 24 h, the mixture is cooled down, and diluted with EtOAc (100 mL). The organic solution is washed with brine, dried over Na 2 S0 4 . and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford crude product.
  • Step 2 Compound 22b (1.0 mmole) and Et 3 N (2.0 mmole) are dissolved in 5 mL of N, N'-dimethylformamide (DMF) followed by addition of benzene- 1,3- disulfonylchloride (0.5 mmole). After stirring at ambient temperature for 24 h, the reaction mixture is diluted with brine (20 mL), and extracted with EtOAc (50 mL). The organic phase is washed with sat. ⁇ aHC0 3 and brine, and dried over MgSO 4 .
  • DMF N, N'-dimethylformamide
  • the above ingredients are mixed and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 340 mg quantities.
  • Example 2 A tablet Formula is prepared using the ingredients below:
  • Quantity Ingredient (mg/tablet)
  • Stearic acid 5.0 The components are blended and compressed to form tablets, each weighing 240 mg.
  • a dry powder inhaler formulation is prepared containing the following components:
  • the active ingredient is mixed with the lactose and the mixture is added to a dry powder inhaling appliance.
  • Tablets each containing 30 mg of active ingredient, are prepared as follows:
  • the active ingredient, starch and cellulose are passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve and mixed thoroughly.
  • the solution of polyvinylpyrrolidone is mixed with the resultant powders, which are then passed through a 16 mesh U.S. sieve.
  • the granules so produced are dried at 50° to 60°C and passed through a 16 mesh U.S. sieve.
  • the sodium carboxymethyl starch, magnesium stearate, and talc previously passed through a No. 30 mesh U.S. sieve, are then added to the granules which, after mixing, are compressed on a tablet machine to yield tablets each weighing 120 mg.
  • Example 5 Capsules, each containing 40 mg of medicament are made as follows: Quantity
  • the active ingredient, starch, and magnesium stearate are blended, passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve, and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 150 mg quantities.
  • Example 6 Suppositories, each containing 25 mg of active ingredient are made as follows:
  • Example 7 The active ingredient is passed through a No. 60 mesh U.S. sieve and suspended in the saturated fatty acid glycerides previously melted using the minimum heat necessary. The mixture is then poured into a suppository mold of nominal 2.0 g capacity and allowed to cool.
  • Example 7 The active ingredient is passed through a No. 60 mesh U.S. sieve and suspended in the saturated fatty acid glycerides previously melted using the minimum heat necessary. The mixture is then poured into a suppository mold of nominal 2.0 g capacity and allowed to cool.
  • the active ingredient, sucrose and xanthan gum are blended, passed through a No. 10 mesh U.S. sieve, and then mixed with a previously made solution of the microcrystalline cellulose and sodium carboxymethyl cellulose in water.
  • the sodium benzoate, flavor, and color are diluted with some of the water and added with stirring. Sufficient water is then added to produce the required volume.
  • Example 8 A formulation may be prepared as follows:
  • Example 9 The active ingredient, starch, and magnesium stearate are blended, passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve, and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 425.0 mg quantities.
  • Example 9 The active ingredient, starch, and magnesium stearate are blended, passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve, and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 425.0 mg quantities.
  • a formulation may be prepared as follows:
  • a topical formulation may be prepared as follows:
  • the white soft paraffin is heated until molten.
  • the liquid paraffin and emulsifying wax are inco ⁇ orated and stirred until dissolved.
  • the active ingredient is added and stirring is continued until dispersed.
  • the mixture is then cooled until solid.
  • transdermal delivery devices Such transdermal patches may be used to provide continuous or discontinuous infusion of the compounds of the present invention in controlled amounts.
  • the construction and use of transdermal patches for the delivery of pharmaceutical agents is well known in the art. See, e.g., U.S. Patent 5.023.252, issued June 1 1, 1991 , herein incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • patches may be constructed for continuous, pulsatile, or on demand delivery of pharmaceutical agents.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
  • Cardiology (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Pulmonology (AREA)
  • Pain & Pain Management (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Analytical Chemistry (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Psychiatry (AREA)
  • Reproductive Health (AREA)
  • Endocrinology (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • Pregnancy & Childbirth (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Gynecology & Obstetrics (AREA)
  • Biotechnology (AREA)
  • Cell Biology (AREA)
  • Pathology (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention is directed to multibinding compounds which are β3-adrenergic receptor agonists and are therefore useful in the treatment and prevention of metabolic disorders such as obesity, diabetes, and the like.

Description

β3- ADRENERGIC RECEPTOR AGONISTS
CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS:
This application claims the benefit of U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 60/088,466, filed June 8, 1998; and U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 60/092,938, filed July 15, 1998; the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Field of the Invention
This invention relates to novel multibinding compounds (agents) that are β3 adrenergic receptor agonists and pharmaceutical compositions comprising such compounds. Accordingly, the multibinding compounds and pharmaceutical compositions of this invention are useful in the treatment and prevention of metabolic disorders such as obesity, diabetes, and the like.
References
The following publications are cited in this application as superscript numbers:
1 Hardman, J. G., et al. "The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics", McGraw-Hill, New York, (1996)
2 Strosberg, A. D. "Structure, Function, and Regulation of Adrenergic Receptors" Protein Sci. 2, 1198-1209 (1993). 3 Beck-Sickinger, A. G. "Structure Characterization and Binding Sites of G-Protein-coupled Receptors" DDT, 1, 502-513, (1996). 4 Hein, L. & Kobilka, B. K. "Adrenergic Receptor Signal Transduction and Regulation" NeuropharmacoL 34, 357-366, (1995).
5 Strosberg, A. D. & Pietri-Rouxel, F. "Function, and Regulation of β3 Adrenoceptor" TiPS, 17, 373-381, (1996).
6 Kurscheid, T. et al. "The cost implications of obesity of health care and society" Intl. J. of Obesity. 22 (suppl. 1):S3. (1998).
7 Weiser, et al. "Pharmacologic approach to obesity". J. Clin. Pharmacol. 37:453, (1997).
All of the above publications are herein incorporated by reference in their entirety to the same extent as if each individual publication was specifically and individually indicated to be incoφorated by reference in its entirety.
State of the Art
A receptor is a biological structure with one or more binding domains that reversibly complexes with one or more ligands. where that complexation has biological consequences. Receptors can exist entirely outside the cell (extracellular receptors), within the cell membrane (but presenting sections of the receptor to the extracellular milieu and cytosol), or entirely within the cell
(intracellular receptors). They may also function independently of a cell (e.g., clot formation). Receptors within the cell membrane allow a cell to communicate with the space outside of its boundaries (i.e., signaling) as well as to function in the transport of molecules and ions into and out of the cell. A ligand is a binding partner for a specific receptor or family of receptors.
A ligand may be the endogenous ligand for the receptor or alternatively may be a synthetic ligand for the receptor such as a drug, a drug candidate or a pharmacological tool.
The super family of seven transmembrane proteins (7-TMs), also called G-protein coupled receptors (GPCRs), represents one of the most significant classes of membrane bound receptors that communicate changes that occur outside of the cell's boundaries to its interior, triggering a cellular response when appropriate. The G-proteins, when activated, affect a wide range of downstream effector systems both positively and negatively (e.g., ion channels, protein kinase cascades, transcription, transmigration of adhesion proteins, and the like).
Adrenergic receptors (AR) are members of the G-protein coupled receptors that are composed of a family of three receptor sub-types: αl (A B D) α2 (A B c), and β G. -. s)-1"5 These receptors are expressed in tissues of various systems and organs of mammals and the proportions of the α and the β receptors are tissue dependant. For example, βl is found in cardiac tissue, β2 is found in the uterus, skeletal muscle, and lungs5 and β3 is predominantly found in adipose tissue5.
It has been established that obesity is the main cause of non-insulin dependent diabetes (NIDDM) and an important factor for cardiovascular disease 6 7. It has been shown that treatment with β3-AR agonists: 1 ) reduces diet-induced obesity in mice; 2) leads to reduction of weight in adult dogs; and 3) regulates lipolysis in human adipocytes expressing β3-AR, in vitro 9.
Currently, a number of β3-AR agonists such as BRL 26830A. BRL 35135, Ro 16-8174, Ro 40-2148 and CL 316,24322 are development for the treatment of obesity. Unfortunately, the half -lives of these drugs are short and their bioavailabilty is poor7. Furthermore, they suffer from adverse side effects including cardiovascular abnormalities, tremors, insomnia, dizziness, and elevated systolic blood pressure. Accordingly, there is a need for long acting. β3-AR selective drugs that are efficacious and lack unpleasant side effects. The multibinding compounds of the present invention fulfill this need. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
This invention is directed to novel multibinding compounds (agents) that are β3 adrenergic receptor agonists and are therefore useful in the treatment and prevention of diseases related to metabolic disorders such as obesity, diabetes, and the like.
Accordingly, in one of its composition aspects, this invention provides a multibinding compound of Formula (I):
( )p(X)q
(I) wherein: p is an integer of from 2 to 10; q is an integer of from 1 to 20, each ligand, L, is independently of each other:
(i) a compound of formula (a):
Figure imgf000006_0001
(a)
wherein:
Ar1 is selected from the group consisting of aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, and heterocyclyl wherein each of said Ar1 substituent optionally links the ligand to a linker via a covalent bond;
R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, and a covalent bond that links the ligand to a linker;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl. and a covalent bond that links the ligand to a linker; or (ii) a compound of formula (b):
Figure imgf000007_0001
(b)
wherein:
Ar is selected from the group consisting of aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, and heterocyclyl wherein each of said Ar substituent optionally links the ligand to a linker via a covalent bond; R4 and R5 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, and a covalent bond that links the ligand to a linker;
W is a covalent bond, alkyl or substituted alkyl where one or more of the carbon atoms in said alkyl or substituted alkyl group is optionally replaced by one or more heteroatom selected from -0-, S(0)n- (where n is an integer from 0 to 2), or -NR4- (where R4 is hydrogen, or alkyl); and
Ar3 is selected from the group consisting of aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl. and heterocycle wherein each of said Ar3 substituent optionally links the ligand to a linker via a covalent bond; each linker, X, in the multibinding compound of Formula (I) independently has the formula:
-Xa-Z-(Ya-Z)m-Xa- wherein: m is an integer of from 0 to 20;
Xa at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -0-, -S-, -NR-, -C(O)-, -C(O)0-, -OC(O)-, -C(0)NR-, -NRC(O)-, C(S), -C(S)0-, -C(S)NR-, -NRC(S)-, or a covalent bond where R is as defined below;
Z at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of alkylene, substituted alkylene, cycloalkylene, substituted cylcoalkylene. alkenylene. substituted alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylene, cycloalkenylene, substituted cycloalkenylene, arylene, heteroarylene, heterocyclene, or a covalent bond; each Ya at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -0-, -C(O)-, -OC(O)-. -C(O)0-, -NR-, -S(0)n-, -C(0)NR'-. -NR'C(O)-,
-NR'C(0)NR'-, -NR'C(S)NR'-, -C(=NR')-NR\ -NR'-C(=NR , -OC(0)-NR'-, -NR'-C(0)-0-, -N=C(Xa)-NR'-, -NR'-C(Xa)-N-,-P(0)(OR')-0-, -0-P(0)(OR , -S(0)nCR' R"-, -S(0)n-NR'-, -NR'-S(O).-. and a covalent bond; where n is 0, 1 or 2; and R, R" and R" at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl. alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, individual isomer, mixtures of isomers, and prodrugs thereof provided that the multibinding compound of Formula (I) cannot be:
(i) a compound of formula:
Figure imgf000008_0001
where the linker, X, is -0-(alkylene)-0-, -0-(hydroxyalkylene)-0-, -0-[(CH2)2. [(OCH2CH2)n]-0- (where n is an integer of 1 to 3). or -NHCO-(alkylene)-CONH-; and (ii) a compound of formula RaRbNCH(CH3)CH2[-OCH2CH(CH3)-]2.8NRaRb wherein Ra is an aryl-OCH2CH(OH)CH2- group and Rb is either hydrogen or an aryl-OCH2CH(OH)CH2- group where the aryl group is 2-allylphenyl, 4-(2- methoxyethyl)phenyl, 1 -naphthyl, or 4-methoxyphenyl.
Preferably, q is less than/? in the multibinding compounds of this invention. In another aspect, this invention provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and an effective amount of a multibinding compound of Formula (I):
(L)p(X)q (I) wherein: p is an integer of from 2 to 10; q is an integer of from 1 to 20, each ligand, L, is independently of each other: (i) a compound of formula (a):
Figure imgf000009_0001
wherein:
Ar1 is selected from the group consisting of aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, and heterocyclyl wherein each of said Ar1 substituent optionally links the ligand to a linker via a covalent bond; R' and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, and a covalent bond that links the ligand to a linker;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, and a covalent bond that links the ligand to a linker; or (ii) a compound of formula (b):
Figure imgf000010_0001
(b)
wherein:
Ar2 is selected from the group consisting of aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, and heterocyclyl wherein each of said Ar2 substituent optionally links the ligand to a linker via a covalent bond; R4 and R5 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, and a covalent bond that links the ligand to a linker;
W is a covalent bond, alkyl, or substituted alkyl where one or more of the carbon atoms in said alkyl or substituted alkyl group is optionally replaced by one or more heteroatom selected from -O-, S(0)n- (where n is an integer from 0 to 2), or -NR4- (where R4 is hydrogen, or alkyl); and
Ar3 is selected from the group consisting of aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, and heterocycle wherein each of said Ar3 substituent optionally links the ligand to a linker via a covalent bond; each linker, X, in the multibinding compound of Formula (I) independently has the formula:
-Xa-Z-(Ya-Z)m-Xa- wherein: m is an integer of from 0 to 20;
Xa at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -0-, -S-, -NR-, -C(O)-, -C(0)0-, -OC(O)-, -C(0)NR-, -NRC(O)-, C(S), -C(S)0-, -C(S)NR-, -NRC(S)-, or a covalent bond where R is as defined below;
Z at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of alkylene, substituted alkylene, cycloalkylene, substituted cylcoalkylene, alkenylene. substituted alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylene, cycloalkenylene, substituted cycloalkenylene, arylene, heteroarylene, heterocyclene, or a covalent bond; each Ya at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -0-, -C(O)-, -OC(O)-, -C(O)0-, -NR-, -S(0)n-, -C(0)NR\ -NR'C(O)-,
-NR'C(O)NR'-, -NR'C(S)NR'-, -C(=NR')-NR'-, -NR'-C(=NR , -OC(0)-NR\ -NR'-C(O)-0-, -N=C(Xa)-NR\ -NR'-C(Xa)=N-,-P(0)(OR')-0-, -0-P(0)(OR , -S(0)nCR' R"-, -S(0)n-NR'-, -NR'-S(0)n -, and a covalent bond; where n is 0, 1 or 2; and R, R' and R'" at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl. aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, individual isomer, mixtures of isomers, and prodrugs thereof provided that the multibinding compound of Formula (I) cannot be:
(i) a compound of formula:
Figure imgf000011_0001
where the linker, X, is -0-(alkylene)-0-, -0-(hydroxyalkylene)-0-, -0-[(CH2)2. [(OCH2CH2)n]-O- (where n is an integer of 1 to 3), or -NHCO-(alkylene)-CONH-; and (ii) a compound of formula RaRbNCH(CH3)CH2[-OCH2CH(CH3)-]2.8NRaRb wherein Ra is an aryl-OCH2CH(OH)CH2- group and Rb is either hydrogen or an aryl-OCH2CH(OH)CH2- group where the aryl group is 2-allylphenyl, 4-(2- methoxyethyl)phenyl, 1 -naphthyl, or 4-methoxyphenyl. In still another aspect, this invention provides a method of treating diseases mediated by a β3 adrenergic receptor in a mammal, said method comprising administering to said mammal a therapeutically effective amount of a pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a multibinding compound of Formula (I):
(L)p(X)q
(I) wherein: p is an integer of from 2 to 10; q is an integer of from 1 to 20, each ligand, L, is independently of each other: (i) a compound of formula (a):
Figure imgf000012_0001
(a)
wherein:
Ar1 is selected from the group consisting of aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, and heterocyclyl wherein each of said Ar1 substituent optionally links the ligand to a linker via a covalent bond;
R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, and a covalent bond that links the ligand to a linker; R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, and a covalent bond that links the ligand to a linker; or
(ii) a compound of formula (b):
Figure imgf000013_0001
wherein:
Ar2 is selected from the group consisting of aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, and heterocyclyl wherein each of said Ar substituent optionally links the ligand to a linker via a covalent bond; R4 and R5 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, and a covalent bond that links the ligand to a linker;
W is a covalent bond, alkyl, or substituted alkyl where one or more of the carbon atoms in said alkyl or substituted alkyl group is optionally replaced by one or more heteroatom selected from -0-, S(0)n- (where n is an integer from 0 to 2), or -NR4- (where R4 is hydrogen, or alkyl); and
Ar3 is selected from the group consisting of aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, and heterocycle wherein each of said Ar3 substituent optionally links the ligand to a linker via a covalent bond; each linker, X, in the multibinding compound of Formula (I) independently has the formula:
-Xa-Z-(Ya-Z)m-Xa- wherein: m is an integer of from 0 to 20;
Xa at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -0-, -S-, -NR-, -C(O)-, -C(0)0-, -OC(O)-, -C(0)NR-, -NRC(O)-, C(S), -C(S)0-, -C(S)NR-, -NRC(S)-, or a covalent bond where R is as defined below;
Z at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of alkylene, substituted alkylene, cycloalkylene, substituted cylcoalkylene. alkenylene, substituted alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylene, cycloalkenylene, substituted cycloalkenylene, arylene, heteroarylene, heterocyclene, or a covalent bond; each Ya at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -0-, -C(O)-, -OC(O)-, -C(0)0-, -NR-, -S(O)n-, -C(0)NR'-, -NR'C(O)-,
-NR'C(O)NR'-, -NR'C(S)NR'-, -C(=NR')-NR"-, -NR'-C(=NR , -OC(0)-NR\ -NR'-C(O)-O-, -N=C(Xa)-NR\ -NR'-C(Xa)=N-,-P(0)(OR')-0-, -0-P(0)(OR')-, -S(0)nCR' R"-, -S(0)n-NR'-, -NR'-S(0)n -. and a covalent bond; where n is 0, 1 or 2; and R, R' and R" at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl. substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, individual isomer, mixtures of isomers, and prodrugs thereof provided that the multibinding compound of Formula (I) cannot be:
(i) a compound of formula:
Figure imgf000014_0001
where the linker, X, is -0-(alkylene)-O-, -O-(hydroxyalkylene)-0-, -0-[(CH2)2. [(OCH2CH2)n]-0- (where n is an integer of 1 to 3), or -NHCO-(alkylene)-CONH-; and (ii) a compound of formula RaRbNCH(CH3)CH2[-OCH2CH(CH3)-]2.8NRaRb wherein Ra is an aryl-OCH2CH(OH)CH2- group and Rb is either hydrogen or an aryl-OCH2CH(OH)CH2- group where the aryl group is 2-allylphenyl, 4-(2- methoxyethyl)phenyl. 1 -naphthyl, or 4-methoxyphenyl. In still another aspect, this invention is directed to general synthetic methods for generating large libraries of diverse multimeric compounds which multimeric compounds are candidates for possessing multibinding properties for β3 adrenergic receptor. The diverse multimeric compound libraries provided by this invention are synthesized by combining a linker or linkers with a ligand or ligands to provide for a library of multimeric compounds wherein the linker and ligand each have complementary functional groups permitting covalent linkage. The library of linkers is preferably selected to have diverse properties such as valency, linker length, linker geometry and rigidity, hydrophilicity or hydrophobicity, amphiphilicity, acidity, basicity and polarization. The library of ligands is preferably selected to have diverse attachment points on the same ligand. different functional groups at the same site of otherwise the same ligand, and the like.
This invention is also directed to libraries of diverse multimeric compounds which multimeric compounds are candidates for possessing multibinding properties for β3 adrenergic receptor. These libraries are prepared via the methods described above and permit the rapid and efficient evaluation of what molecular constraints impart multibinding properties to a ligand or a class of ligands targeting a receptor.
Accordingly, in one of its method aspects, this invention is directed to a method for identifying multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties for β3 adrenergic receptor which method comprises:
(a) identifying a ligand or a mixture of ligands wherein each ligand contains at least one reactive functionality;
(b) identifying a library of linkers wherein each linker in said library comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand;
(c) preparing a multimeric ligand compound library by combining at least two stoichiometric equivalents of the ligand or mixture of ligands identified in (a) with the library of linkers identified in (b) under conditions wherein the complementary functional groups react to form a covalent linkage between said linker and at least two of said ligands; and (d) assaying the multimeric ligand compounds produced in (c) above to identify multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties for β3 adrenergic receptor.
In another of its method aspects, this invention is directed to a method for identifying multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties for β3 adrenergic receptor which method comprises:
(a) identifying a library of ligands wherein each ligand contains at least one reactive functionality;
(b) identifying a linker or mixture of linkers wherein each linker comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand;
(c) preparing a multimeric ligand compound library by combining at least two stoichiometric equivalents of the library of ligands identified in (a) with the linker or mixture of linkers identified in (b) under conditions wherein the complementary functional groups react to form a covalent linkage between said linker and at least two of said ligands; and
(d) assaying the multimeric ligand compounds produced in (c) above to identify multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties for β3 adrenergic receptor. The preparation of the multimeric ligand compound library is achieved by either the sequential or concurrent combination of the two or more stoichiometric equivalents of the ligands identified in (a) with the linkers identified in (b). Sequential addition is preferred when a mixture of different ligands is employed to ensure heterodimeric or multimeric compounds are prepared. Concurrent addition of the ligands occurs when at least a portion of the multimer comounds prepared are homomultimeric compounds.
The assay protocols recited in (d) can be conducted on the multimeric ligand compound library produced in (c) above, or preferably, each member of the library is isolated by preparative liquid chromatography mass spectrometry (LCMS). In one of its composition aspects, this invention is directed to a library of multimeric ligand compounds which may possess multivalent properties for β3 adrenergic receptor which library is prepared by the method comprising:
(a) identifying a ligand or a mixture of ligands wherein each ligand contains at least one reactive functionality;
(b) identifying a library of linkers wherein each linker in said library comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand; and
(c) preparing a multimeric ligand compound library by combining at least two stoichiometric equivalents of the ligand or mixture of ligands identified in (a) with the library of linkers identified in (b) under conditions wherein the complementary functional groups react to form a covalent linkage between said linker and at least two of said ligands.
In another of its composition aspects, this invention is directed to a library of multimeric ligand compounds which may possess multivalent properties for β3 adrenergic receptor which library is prepared by the method comprising:
(a) identifying a library of ligands wherein each ligand contains at least one reactive functionality;
(b) identifying a linker or mixture of linkers wherein each linker comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand; and
(c) preparing a multimeric ligand compound library by combining at least two stoichiometric equivalents of the library of ligands identified in (a) with the linker or mixture of linkers identified in (b) under conditions wherein the complementary functional groups react to form a covalent linkage between said linker and at least two of said ligands.
In a preferred embodiment, the library of linkers employed in either the methods or the library aspects of this invention is selected from the group comprising flexible linkers, rigid linkers, hydrophobic linkers, hydrophilic linkers, linkers of different geometry, acidic linkers, basic linkers, linkers of different polarization and amphiphilic linkers. For example, in one embodiment, each of the linkers in the linker library may comprise linkers of different chain length and/or having different complementary reactive groups. Such linker lengths can preferably range from about 2 to 100A. In another preferred embodiment, the ligand or mixture of ligands is selected to have reactive functionality at different sites on said ligands in order to provide for a range of orientations of said ligand on said multimeric ligand compounds. Such reactive functionality includes, by way of example, carboxylic acids, carboxylic acid halides, carboxyl esters, amines, halides,pseudohalides, isocyanates, vinyl unsaturation, ketones, aldehydes, thiols, alcohols, anhydrides, boronates, and precursors thereof. It is understood, of course, that the reactive functionality on the ligand is selected to be complementary to at least one of the reactive groups on the linker so that a covalent linkage can be formed between the linker and the ligand. In other embodiments, the multimeric ligand compound is homomeric (i.e., each of the ligands is the same, although it may be attached at different points) or heteromeric (i.e., at least one of the ligands is different from the other ligands).
In addition to the combinatorial methods described herein, this invention provides for an iterative process for rationally evaluating what molecular constraints impart multibinding properties to a class of multimeric compounds or ligands targeting a receptor. Specifically, this method aspect is directed to a method for identifying multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties for β3 adrenergic receptor which method comprises:
(a) preparing a first collection or iteration of multimeric compounds which is prepared by contacting at least two stoichiometric equivalents of the ligand or mixture of ligands which target a receptor with a linker or mixture of linkers wherein said ligand or mixture of ligands comprises at least one reactive functionality and said linker or mixture of linkers comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand wherein said contacting is conducted under conditions wherein the complementary functional groups react to form a covalent linkage between said linker and at least two of said ligands;
(b) assaying said first collection or iteration of multimeric compounds to assess which if any of said multimeric compounds possess multibinding properties for β3 adrenergic receptor;
(c) repeating the process of (a) and (b) above until at least one multimeric compound is found to possess multibinding properties for β3 adrenergic receptor;
(d) evaluating what molecular constraints imparted multibinding properties to the multimeric compound or compounds for β3 adrenergic receptor found in the first iteration recited in (a)- (c) above;
(e) creating a second collection or iteration of multimeric compounds which elaborates upon the particular molecular constraints imparting multibinding properties to the multimeric compound or compounds found in said first iteration; (f) evaluating what molecular constraints imparted enhanced multibinding properties to the multimeric compound or compounds found in the second collection or iteration recited in (e) above;
(g) optionally repeating steps (e) and (f) to further elaborate upon said molecular constraints. Preferably, steps (e) and (f) are repeated at least two times, more preferably at from 2-50 times, even more preferably from 3 to 50 times, and still more preferably at least 5-50 times.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS FIG. 1 illustrates examples of multibinding compounds comprising 2 ligands attached in different formats to a linker.
FIG. 2 illustrates examples of multibinding compounds comprising 3 ligands attached in different formats to a linker.
FIG. 3 illustrates examples of multibinding compounds comprising 4 ligands attached in different formats to a linker. FIG. 4 illustrates examples of multibinding compounds comprising >4 ligands attached in different formats to a linker.
FIGURES 5-16 illustrate various methods of preparing bivalent multibinding compounds of Formula (I).
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION Definitions This invention is directed to multibinding compounds which are β3 adrenergic receptor agonists, pharmaceutical compositions containing such compounds and methods for treating diseases mediated by β3 adrenergic receptor in mammals. When discussing such compounds, compositions or methods, the following terms have the following meanings unless otherwise indicated. Any undefined terms have their art recognized meanings.
The term "alkyl" refers to a monoradical branched or unbranched saturated hydrocarbon chain preferably having from 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms. This term is exemplified by groups such as methyl, ethyl, π-propyl, wo-propyl, «-butyl, iso- butyl, ft-hexyl, n-decyl, tetradecyl, and the like.
The term "substituted alkyl" refers to an alkyl group as defined above, having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl. carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, - S02-alkyl, -S02-substituted alkyl, -S02-aryl and -S02-heteroaryl. This term is exemplified by groups such as hydroxymethyl. hydroxyethyl, hydroxypropyl, 2- aminoethyl, 3-aminopropyl, 2-methylaminoefhyl, 3-dimethylaminopropyl, 2-sulfonamidoethyl, 2-carboxyethyl, and the like.
The term "alkylene" refers to a diradical of a branched or unbranched saturated hydrocarbon chain, preferably having from 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms and even more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms. This term is exemplified by groups such as methylene (-CH2-), ethylene
(-CH2CH2-), the propylene isomers (e.g., -CH2CH2CH2- and -CH(CH3)CH2-) and the like.
The term "substituted alkylene" refers to an alkylene group, as defined above, having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl. carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -S02-alkyl, -S02-substituted alkyl, -S02-aryl and -S02-heteroaryl. Additionally, such substituted alkylene groups include those where 2 substituents on the alkylene group are fused to form one or more cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, aryl, heterocyclic or heteroaryl groups fused to the alkylene group. Preferably such fused groups contain from 1 to 3 fused ring structures.
The term "alkaryl" or "aralkyl" refers to the groups -alkylene-aryl and -substituted alkylene-aryl where alkylene, substituted alkylene and aryl are defined herein. Such alkaryl groups are exemplified by benzyl, phenethyl and the like.
The term "alkoxy" refers to the groups alkyl-O-, alkenyl-O-, cycloalkyl-O-, cycloalkenyl-O-, aryl-O-, heteroaryl-O-, and alkynyl-O-, where alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, and alkynyl are as defined herein. Preferred alkoxy groups are alkyl-O- and include, by way of example, methoxy, ethoxy, «-propoxy. w -propoxy, rc-butoxy, tert-butoxy, sec-butoxy, ^-pentoxy, π-hexoxy, 1 ,2- dimethylbutoxy, and the like.
The term "substituted alkoxy" refers to the groups substituted alkyl-O-, substituted alkenyl-O-, substituted cycloalkyl-O-, substituted cycloalkenyl-O-, and substituted alkynyl-O- where substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, substituted cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkenyl and substituted alkynyl are as defined herein. The term "alkenyl" refers to a monoradical of a branched or unbranched unsaturated hydrocarbon group preferably having from 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 10 carbon atoms and even more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and preferably from 1-6 sites of vinyl unsaturation. Preferred alkenyl groups include ethenyl (-CH=CH2), π-propenyl (-CH2CH=CH2), iso- propenyl (-C(CH3)=CH2), and the like.
The term "substituted alkenyl" refers to an alkenyl group as defined above having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy. aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl,
-SO2-alkyl, -S02-substituted alkyl, -S02-aryl and -SO2-heteroaryl.
The term "alkenylene" refers to a diradical of a branched or unbranched unsaturated hydrocarbon group preferably having from 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 10 carbon atoms and even more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and preferably from 1-6 sites of vinyl unsaturation. This term is exemplified by groups such as ethenylene (-CH=CH-), the propenylene isomers
(e.g., -CH2CH=CH-, -C(CH3)=CH-, and the like.
The term "substituted alkenylene" refers to an alkenylene group as defined above having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably from 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl. substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, - SO-heteroaryl, -S02-alkyl, -S02-substituted alkyl, -S02-aryl and -S02-heteroaryl. Additionally, such substituted alkenylene groups include those where 2 substituents on the alkenylene group are fused to form one or more cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, aryl, heterocyclic or heteroaryl groups fused to the alkenylene group.
The term "alkynyl" refers to a monoradical of an unsaturated hydrocarbon preferably having from 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 20 carbon atoms and even more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and preferably from 1-6 sites of acetylene (triple bond) unsaturation. Preferred alkynyl groups include ethynyl (-C≡CH), propargyl (-CH2C≡CH) and the like.
The term "substituted alkynyl" refers to an alkynyl group as defined above having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic. heterocyclooxy. hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -S02-alkyl, -S02-substituted alkyl, -S02-aryl, and -S02-heteroaryl.
The term "alkynylene" refers to a diradical of an unsaturated hydrocarbon preferably having from 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 10 carbon atoms and even more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and preferably from 1-6 sites of acetylene (triple bond) unsaturation. Preferred alkynylene groups include ethynylene (-C≡C-), propargylene (-CH2C≡C-) and the like.
The term "substituted alkynylene" refers to an alkynylene group as defined above having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl. aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol. thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -S02-alkyl, -SO:-substituted alkyl, -S02-aryl and -S02-heteroaryl
The term "acyl" refers to the groups HC(O)-, alkyl-C(O)-, substituted alkyl- C(O)-, alkenyl-C(O)-, substituted alkenyl-C(O)-, cycloalkyl-C(O)-, substituted cycloalkyl-C(O)-, cycloalkenyl-C(O)-, substituted cycloalkenyl-C(O)-, aryl-C(O)-, heteroaryl-C(O)- and heterocyclic-C(O)- where alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
The term "acylamino" or "aminocarbonyl" refers to the group -C(0)NRR where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic or where both R groups are joined to form a heterocyclic group (e.g., morpholino) wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl. heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
The term "sulfonylamino" refers to the group -NRSO2Ra where R is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aralkyl. or heteroaralkyl, and Ra is alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, amino, or substituted amino wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl. aryl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, heteroaralkyl and substituted amino are as defined herein.
The term "aminoacyl" refers to the group -NRC(0)R where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, amino, substituted amino, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
The term "aminoacyloxy" or "alkoxycarbonylamino" refers to the group -NRC(O)OR where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
The term "acyloxy" refers to the groups alkyl-C(0)0-, substituted alkyl- C(0)0-, cycloalkyl-C(0)0-, substituted cycloalkyl-C(0)0-, aryl-C(O)0-, heteroaryl-C(0)0-, and heterocyclic-C(0)0- wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
The term "aryl" refers to an unsaturated aromatic carbocyclic group of from 6 to 20 carbon atoms having a single ring (e.g., phenyl) or multiple condensed (fused) rings (e.g., naphthyl or anthryl). The aryl group may optionally be fused to a heterocyclic, cycloalkyl, or substituted cycloalkyl group. Preferred aryls include phenyl, naphthyl and the like. Unless otherwise constrained by the definition for the aryl substituent, such aryl groups can optionally be substituted with from 1 to 5 substituents, preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of acyloxy, hydroxy, thiol, acyl. alkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkoxy, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, substituted cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkenyl. amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, acylamino, sulfonylamino, alkaryl, aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, -SO-alkyl. -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl. -SO- heteroaryl, -S02-alkyl, -S02-substituted alkyl, -S02-aryl, -S02-heteroaryl -O- CH2P(O)(OH)(n-C5Hπ), -0-CH2P(O)(OH)(phenyl), and trihalomethyl. Preferred aryl substituents include alkyl, alkoxy, halo, cyano. nitro, trihalomethyl, and thioalkoxy. The term "aryloxy" refers to the group aryl-O- wherein the aryl group is as defined above including optionally substituted aryl groups as also defined above.
The term "arylene" refers to the diradical derived from aryl (including substituted aryl) as defined above and is exemplified by 1,2-phenylene, 1 ,3- phenylene, 1 ,4-phenylene, 1 ,2-naphthylene and the like. The term "amino" refers to the group -NH2.
The term "substituted amino" refers to the group -NRR where each R is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, acyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl. heteroaryl and heterocyclic provided that both R"s are not hydrogen.
The term "carboxyalkyl" or "alkoxycarbonyl" refers to the groups "-C(O)O-alkyl", "-C(0)0-substituted alkyl", "-C(0)0-cycloalkyl", "-C(O)0- substituted cycloalkyl", "-C(0)0-alkenyl", "-C(0)0-substituted alkenyl", "-C(O)O-alkynyl" and "-C(0)0-substituted alkynyl" where alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl and substituted alkynyl alkynyl are as defined herein.
The term "cycloalkyl" refers to cyclic alkyl groups of from 3 to 20 carbon atoms having a single cyclic ring or multiple condensed rings, said cycloalkyl group may optionally be fused to an aryl or heteroaryl group. Such cycloalkyl groups include, by way of example, single ring structures such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclooctyl, and the like, or multiple ring structures such as adamantanyl, and the like.
The term "substituted cycloalkyl" refers to cycloalkyl groups having from 1 to 5 substituents. and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl. substituted alkenyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl. cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl. acylamino, acyloxy. amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano. halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -S02-alkyl, -S02-substituted alkyl, -S02-aryl and -S02-heteroaryl. The term "cycloalkenyl" refers to cyclic alkenyl groups of from 4 to 20 carbon atoms having a single cyclic ring and at least one point of internal unsaturation. Examples of suitable cycloalkenyl groups include, for instance, cyclobut-2-enyl, cyclopent-3-enyl, cyclooct-3-enyl and the like.
The term "substituted cycloalkenyl" refers to cycloalkenyl groups having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy. amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO- substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -S02-alkyl, -SO2-substituted alkyl, -SO2-aryl and -SO2-heteroaryl. The term "halo" or "halogen" refers to fluoro, chloro, bromo and iodo.
The term "heteroaryl" refers to an aromatic group of from 1 to 15 carbon atoms and 1 to 4 heteroatoms selected from oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur within at least one ring (if there is more than one ring). The heteroaryl ring may optionally be fused to a cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl ring. Unless otherwise constrained by the definition for the heteroaryl substituent, such heteroaryl groups can be optionally substituted with 1 to 5 substituents, preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of acyloxy, hydroxy, thiol, acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkoxy, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, substituted cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, acylamino. alkaryl, aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -S02-alkyl, -S02-substituted alkyl, -S02-aryl. -S02-heteroaryl and trihalomethyl. Preferred heteroaryl substituents include alkyl, alkoxy, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, and thioalkoxy. Such heteroaryl groups can have a single ring (e.g., pyridyl or furyl) or multiple condensed rings (e.g., indolizinyl or benzothienyl). Preferred heteroaryls include pyridyl, pyrrolyl and furyl. The term "heteroaryloxy" refers to the group heteroaryl-O-. The term "heteroarylene" refers to the diradical group derived from heteroaryl (including substituted heteroaryl), as defined above, and is exemplified by the groups 2,6-pyridylene, 2,4-pyridiylene, 1 ,2-quinolinylene, 1 ,8-quinolinylene, 1 ,4-benzofuranylene, 2,5-pyridnylene, 2,5-indolenyl and the like.
The term "heterocycle" or "heterocyclyl" refers to a monoradical saturated unsaturated group having a single ring or multiple condensed rings, from 1 to 40 carbon atoms and from 1 to 10 hetero atoms, preferably 1 to 4 heteroatoms, selected from nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus, and/or oxygen within the ring and further wherein one, two, or three of the ring carbon atoms may optionally be replaced with a carbonyl group (i.e., a keto group). Unless otherwise constrained by the definition for the heterocyclic substituent, such heterocyclic groups can be optionally substituted with 1 to 5, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido. cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl. thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -S02-alkyl, -S02-substituted alkyl, -SO2-aryl and -SO2-heteroaryl. Such heterocyclic groups can have a single ring or multiple condensed rings. Preferred heterocyclics include morpholino, piperidinyl, and the like.
Examples of heteroaryls and heterocycles include, but are not limited to, pyrrole, thiophene, furan, imidazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, indolizine, isoindole, indole, indazole, purine, quinolizine, isoquinohne, quinoline, phthalazine, naphthylpyridine, quinoxaline, quinazoline, cinnoline, pteridine, carbazole, carboline, phenanthridine, acridine, phenanthroline, isothiazole, phenazine, isoxazole, phenoxazine, phenothiazine, imidazolidine. imidazoline, pyrrolidine, piperidine, piperazine, indoline, morpholine, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothiophene, and the like as well as N-alkoxy-nitrogen containing heterocycles.
The term "heterocyclooxy" refers to the group heterocyclic-O-. The term "thioheterocyclooxy" refers to the group heterocyclic-S-. The term "heterocyclene" refers to the diradical group formed from a heterocycle, as defined herein, and is exemplified by the groups 2,6-morpholino, 2,5-morpholino and the like.
The term "oxyacylamino" or "aminocarbonyloxy" refers to the group -OC(O)NRR where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
The term "spiro-attached cycloalkyl group" refers to a cycloalkyl group joined to another ring via one carbon atom common to both rings. The term "thiol" refers to the group -SH. The term "thioalkoxy" or "alkylthio" refers to the group -S-alkyl.
The term "substituted thioalkoxy" refers to the group -S-substituted alkyl. The term "thioaryloxy" refers to the group aryl-S- wherein the aryl group is as defined above including optionally substituted aryl groups also defined above. The term "thioheteroaryloxy" refers to the group heteroaryl-S- wherein the heteroaryl group is as defined above including optionally substituted aryl groups as also defined above.
As to any of the above groups which contain one or more substituents, it is understood, of course, that such groups do not contain any substitution or substitution patterns which are sterically impractical and/or synthetically non- feasible. In addition, the compounds of this invention include all stereochemical isomers arising from the substitution of these compounds.
The term "pharmaceutically-acceptable salt" refers to salts which retain the biological effectiveness and properties of the multibinding compounds of this invention and which are not biologically or otherwise undesirable. In many cases, the multibinding compounds of this invention are capable of forming acid and/or base salts by virtue of the presence of amino and/or carboxyl groups or groups similar thereto. Pharmaceutically-acceptable base addition salts can be prepared from inorganic and organic bases. Salts derived from inorganic bases, include by way of example only, sodium, potassium, lithium, ammonium, calcium and magnesium salts. Salts derived from organic bases include, but are not limited to, salts of primary, secondary and tertiary amines, such as alkyl amines, dialkyl amines, trialkyl amines, substituted alkyl amines, di(substituted alkyl) amines, tri(substituted alkyl) amines, alkenyl amines, dialkenyl amines, trialkenyl amines, substituted alkenyl amines, di(substituted alkenyl) amines, tri(substituted alkenyl) amines, cycloalkyl amines, di(cycloalkyl) amines, tri(cycloalkyl) amines, substituted cycloalkyl amines, disubstituted cycloalkyl amine, trisubstituted cycloalkyl amines, cycloalkenyl amines, di(cycloalkenyl) amines, tri(cycloalkenyl) amines, substituted cycloalkenyl amines, disubstituted cycloalkenyl amine, trisubstituted cycloalkenyl amines, aryl amines, diaryl amines, triaryl amines, heteroaryl amines, diheteroaryl amines, triheteroaryl amines, heterocyclic amines, diheterocyclic amines, triheterocyclic amines, mixed di- and tri-amines where at least two of the substituents on the amine are different and are selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and the like. Also included are amines where the two or three substituents, together with the amino nitrogen, form a heterocyclic or heteroaryl group. Examples of suitable amines include, by way of example only, isopropylamine, trimethyl amine, diethyl amine, tri(«o-propyl) amine, tri(π-propyl) amine, ethanolamine, 2-dimethylaminoethanol, tromethamine, lysine, arginine, histidine, caffeine, procaine, hydrabamine. choline. betaine, ethylenediamine, glucosamine, N-alkylglucamines, theobromine, purines, piperazine, piperidine. morpholine, N-ethylpiperidine, and the like. It should also be understood that other carboxylic acid derivatives would be useful in the practice of this invention, for example, carboxylic acid amides, including carboxamides, lower alkyl carboxamides, dialkyl carboxamides, and the like.
Pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts may be prepared from inorganic and organic acids. Salts derived from inorganic acids include hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like. Salts derived from organic acids include acetic acid, propionic acid, glycolic acid, pyruvic acid, oxalic acid, malic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, cinnamic acid, mandelic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, -toluene-sulfonic acid, salicylic acid, and the like.
The term "pharmaceutically-acceptable cation" refers to the cation of a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt.
The term "library" refers to at least 3. preferably from 102 to 109 and more preferably from 102 to 104 multimeric compounds. Preferably, these compounds are prepared as a multiplicity of compounds in a single solution or reaction mixture which permits facile synthesis thereof. In one embodiment, the library of multimeric compounds can be directly assayed for multibinding properties. In another embodiment, each member of the library of multimeric compounds is first isolated and, optionally, characterized. This member is then assayed for multibinding properties.
The term "collection" refers to a set of multimeric compounds which are prepared either sequentially or concurrently (e.g., combinatorially). The collection comprises at least 2 members; preferably from 2 to 109 members and still more preferably from 10 to 104 members.
The term "multimeric compound" refers to compounds comprising from 2 to 10 ligands covalently connected through at least one linker which compounds may or may not possess multibinding properties (as defined herein). The term "pseudohalide" refers to functional groups which react in displacement reactions in a manner similar to a halogen. Such functional groups include, by way of example, mesyl, tosyl, azido and cyano groups.
The term "protecting group" or "blocking group" refers to any group which when bound to one or more hydroxyl, thiol, amino or carboxyl groups of the compounds (including intermediates thereof) prevents reactions from occurring at these groups and which protecting group can be removed by conventional chemical or enzymatic steps to reestablish the hydroxyl, thiol, amino or carboxyl group (See., T.W. Greene and P.G.H. Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis^, 2nd Ed.). The particular removable blocking group employed is not critical and preferred removable hydroxyl blocking groups include conventional substituents such as allyl, benzyl, acetyl, chloroacetyl, thiobenzyl, benzylidine, phenacyl, t-butyl- diphenylsilyl and any other group that can be introduced chemically onto a hydroxyl functionality and later selectively removed either by chemical or enzymatic methods in mild conditions compatible with the nature of the product. Preferred removable thiol blocking groups include disulfide groups, acyl groups, benzyl groups, and the like.
Preferred removable amino blocking groups include conventional substituents such as t-butyoxycarbonyl (t-BOC), benzyloxycarbonyl (CBZ), fluorenylmethoxy-carbonyl (FMOC), allyloxycarbonyl (ALOC), and the like which can be removed by conventional conditions compatible with the nature of the product.
Preferred carboxyl protecting groups include esters such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, t-butyl etc. which can be removed by mild conditions compatible with the nature of the product.
The term "optional" or "optionally" means that the subsequently described event, circumstance or substituent may or may not occur, and that the description includes instances where said event or circumstance occurs and instances where it does not. The term "ligand" or " ligands" as used herein denotes a compound that is a binding partner for a β3 adrenergic receptor and is bound thereto by complementarity. Preferred ligands are those that are either β3 adrenergic receptor agonists or antagonists. The specific region, or regions of the ligand that is (are) recognized by the receptor is designated as the "ligand domain". A ligand may be either capable of binding to the receptor by itself, or may require the presence of one or more non-ligand components for binding (e.g., Ca*2, Mg"2 or a water molecule is required for the binding of a ligand to various ligand binding sites). Examples of ligands useful in this invention are described herein. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that portions of the ligand structure that are not essential for specific molecular recognition and binding activity may be varied substantially, replaced or substituted with unrelated structures (for example, with ancillary groups as defined below) and, in some cases, omitted entirely without affecting the binding interaction. The primary requirement for a ligand is that it has a ligand domain as defined above. It is understood that the term ligand is not intended to be limited to compounds known to be useful in binding to β3 adrenergic receptor (e.g., known drugs). Those skilled in the art will understand that the term ligand can equally apply to a molecule that is not normally associated with β3 adrenergic receptor binding properties. In addition, it should be noted that ligands that exhibit marginal activity or lack useful activity as monomers can be highly active as multivalent compounds because of the benefits conferred by multivalency. The term "ligand" or " ligands" as used herein is intended to include the racemic forms of the ligands as well as individual enantiomers and diasteromers and non-racemic mixtures thereof.
The term "multibinding compound or agent" refers to a compound that is capable of multivalency, as defined below, and which has 2-10 ligands covalently bound to one or more linkers. In all cases, each ligand and linker in the multibinding compound is independently selected such that the multibinding compound includes both symmetric compounds (i.e., where each ligand as well as each linker is identical) and asymmetric compounds( (i.e., where at least one of the ligands is different from the other ligand(s) and/or at least one linker is different from the other linker(s)). Multibinding compounds provide a biological and/or therapeutic effect greater than the aggregate of unlinked ligands equivalent thereto which are made available for binding. That is to say that the biological and/or therapeutic effect of the ligands attached to the multibinding compound is greater than that achieved by the same amount of unlinked ligands made available for binding to the ligand binding sites (receptors). The phrase "increased biological or therapeutic effect" includes, for example: increased affinity, increased selectivity for target, increased specificity for target, increased potency, increased efficacy, decreased toxicity, improved duration of activity or action, increased ability to kill cells such as fungal pathogens, cancer cells, etc., decreased side effects, increased therapeutic index, improved bioavailibity, improved pharmacokinetics, improved activity spectrum, and the like. The multibinding compounds of this invention will exhibit at least one and preferably more than one of the above-mentioned affects.
Furthermore, the multibinding compound of the present invention can either be composed of ligands that are known to be β3 adrenergic receptor agonists or they can be composed of ligands that are known to be β3 adrenergic receptor agonists and β3 adrenergic receptor antagonists provided that they exhibit an overall β3 adrenergic receptor agonistic activity.
The term "univalency" as used herein refers to a single binding interaction between one ligand as defined herein with one ligand binding site as defined herein. It should be noted that a compound having multiple copies of a ligand (or ligands) exhibit univalency when only one ligand is interacting with a ligand binding site. Examples of univalent interactions are depicted below.
The term "multivalency" as used herein refers to the concurrent binding of from 2 to 10 linked ligands (which may be the same or different) and two or more corresponding receptors (ligand binding sites) which may be the same or different.
For example, two ligands connected through a linker that bind concurrently to two ligand binding sites would be considered as bivalency; three ligands thus connected would be an example of trivalency. An example of trivalent binding, illustrating a multibinding compound bearing three ligands versus a monovalent binding interaction, is shown below:
Figure imgf000035_0001
Figure imgf000035_0002
univalent interaction
Figure imgf000035_0003
trivalent interaction It should be understood that not all compounds that contain multiple copies of a ligand attached to a linker or to linkers necessarily exhibit the phenomena of multivalency, i.e., that the biological and/or therapeutic effect of the multibinding agent is greater than the sum of the aggregate of unlinked ligands made available for binding to the ligand binding site (receptor). For multivalency to occur, the ligands that are connected by a linker or linkers have to be presented to their ligand binding sites by the linker(s) in a specific manner in order to bring about the desired ligand-orienting result, and thus produce a multibinding event.
The term "potency" refers to the minimum concentration at which a ligand is able to achieve a desirable biological or therapeutic effect. The potency of a ligand is typically proportional to its affinity for its ligand binding site. In some cases, the potency may be non-linearly correlated with its affinity. In comparing the potency of two drugs, e.g., a multibinding agent and the aggregate of its unlinked ligand, the dose-response curve of each is determined under identical test conditions (e.g., in an in vitro or in vivo assay, in an appropriate animal model). The finding that the multibinding agent produces an equivalent biological or therapeutic effect at a lower concentration than the aggregate unlinked ligand is indicative of enhanced potency.
The term "selectivity" or "specificity" is a measure of the binding preferences of a ligand for different ligand binding sites (receptors). The selectivity of a ligand with respect to its target ligand binding site relative to another ligand binding site is given by the ratio of the respective values of Kd (i.e., the dissociation constants for each ligand-receptor complex) or, in cases where a biological effect is observed below the Kd , the ratio of the respective EC50's (i.e., the concentrations that produce 50% of the maximum response for the ligand interacting with the two distinct ligand binding sites (receptors)).
The term "ligand binding site" denotes the site on the β3-adrenergic receptor that recognizes a ligand domain and provides a binding partner for the ligand. The ligand binding site may be defined by monomeric or multimeric structures. This interaction may be capable of producing a unique biological effect, for example, agonism, antagonism, and modulatory effects, or it may maintain an ongoing biological event, and the like.
It should be recognized that the ligand binding sites of the receptor that participate in biological multivalent binding interactions are constrained to varying degrees by their intra- and inter-molecular associations. For example, ligand binding sites may be covalently joined to a single structure, noncovalently associated in a multimeric structure, embedded in a membrane or polymeric matrix, and so on and therefore have less translational and rotational freedom than if the same structures were present as monomers in solution. The terms "agonism" and "antagonism" is well known in the art. The term
"modulatory effect" refers to the ability of the ligand to change the activity of an agonist or antagonist through binding to a ligand binding site.
The term "inert organic solvent" or "inert solvent" means a solvent which is inert under the conditions of the reaction being described in conjunction therewith including, by way of example only, benzene, toluene, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, dimethylformamide. chloroform, methylene chloride, diethyl ether, ethyl acetate, acetone, methylethyl ketone, methanol, ethanol, propanol, isopropanol, t-butanol, dioxane, pyridine, and the like. Unless specified to the contrary, the solvents used in the reactions described herein are inert solvents. The term "treatment" refers to any treatment of a pathologic condition in a mammal, particularly a human, and includes:
(i) preventing the pathologic condition from occurring in a subject which may be predisposed to the condition but has not yet been diagnosed with the condition and, accordingly, the treatment constitutes prophylactic treatment for the disease condition;
(ii) inhibiting the pathologic condition, i.e., arresting its development; (iii) relieving the pathologic condition, i.e., causing regression of the pathologic condition; or
(iv) relieving the conditions mediated by the pathologic condition. The term "pathologic condition which is modulated by treatment with a ligand" covers all disease states (i.e., pathologic conditions) which are generally acknowledged in the art to be usefully treated with a ligand for the β3 -adrenergic receptor in general, and those disease states which have been found to be usefully treated by a specific multibinding compound of our invention. Such disease states include, by way of example only, the treatment of a mammal afflicted with obesity, diabetes, and the like.
The term "therapeutically effective amount" refers to that amount of multibinding compound which is sufficient to effect treatment, as defined above, when administered to a mammal in need of such treatment. The therapeutically effective amount will vary depending upon the subject and disease condition being treated, the weight and age of the subject, the severity of the disease condition, the manner of administration and the like, which can readily be determined by one of ordinary skill in the art. The term "linker", identified where appropriate by the symbol 'X' refers to a group or groups that covalently attaches from 2 to 10 ligands (as identified above) in a manner that provides for a compound capable of multivalency. Among other features, the linker is a ligand-orienting entity that permits attachment of at least two copies of a ligand (which may be the same or different) thereto. In some cases, the linker may itself be biologically active. The term "linker" does not, however, extend to cover solid inert supports such as beads, glass particles, fibers, and the like. But it is understood that the multibinding compounds of this invention can be attached to a solid support if desired. For example, such attachment to solid supports can be made for use in separation and purification processes and similar applications.
The extent to which multivalent binding is realized depends upon the efficiency with which the linker or linkers that joins the ligands presents these ligands to the array of available ligand binding sites. Beyond presenting these ligands for multivalent interactions with ligand binding sites, the linker or linkers spatially constrains these interactions to occur within dimensions defined by the linker or linkers. Thus, the structural features of the linker (valency, geometry, orientation, size, flexibility, chemical composition, etc.) are features of multibinding agents that play an important role in determining their activities.
The linkers used in this invention are selected to allow multivalent binding of ligands to the ligand binding sites of a β3 adrenergic receptor, whether such sites are located interiorly, both interiorly and on the periphery of the receptor structure, or at any intermediate position thereof.
PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS While the broadest definition of this invention is set forth in the Summary of the Invention, certain compounds of Formula (I) are preferred. (A) A preferred group is a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (II):
Figure imgf000039_0001
(II)
wherein: each Ar1 is independently selected from the group consisting of:
Figure imgf000040_0001
(R = H, CN)
Figure imgf000040_0002
and
X is selected from the group consisting of :
Figure imgf000041_0001
Figure imgf000041_0002
(B) Another preferred group is a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (III):
Figure imgf000042_0001
wherein each ligand,
Figure imgf000042_0002
is independently selected from the group consisting of:
Figure imgf000043_0001
and
X is selected from the group consisting of -(CFI2)n- (where n is an integer of from 2 to 8), -(CH2-CH2-0)n l-CH2-CH2- (where nl is 1 or 2), and ortho. meta. or para xylyl. (C) Yet another preferred group is a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (IV):
Figure imgf000044_0001
wherein:
Ar1 , X, and -Ar3-W-N(R5)CH(R4)-CHOH-CH2-0-Ar groups are as defined in (A) and (B) above.
(D) Yet another preferred group is a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (V):
Figure imgf000044_0002
(V)
wherein each ligand,
Figure imgf000044_0003
is independently selected from the group consisting of:
Figure imgf000045_0001
Figure imgf000045_0002
Figure imgf000045_0003
Figure imgf000046_0001
and
X is selected from the group consisting of -(CH2)n- (where n is an integer of from 2 to 8), -(CH2-CH2-0)n ]-CH2-CH2- (where nl is 1 or 2), and ortho. meta, or para xylyl.
GENERAL SYNTHETIC SCHEME Compounds of this invention can be made by the methods depicted in the reaction schemes shown below.
The starting materials and reagents used in preparing these compounds are either available from commercial suppliers such as Aldrich Chemical Co., (Milwaukee, Wisconsin, USA), Bachem (Torrance, California, USA), Emka-Chemie, or Sigma (St. Louis, Missouri, USA) or are prepared by methods known to those skilled in the art following procedures set forth in references such as Fieser and Fieser's Reagents for Organic Synthesis, Volumes 1-15 (John Wiley and Sons, 1991); Rodd's Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, Volumes 1-5 and
Supplementals (Elsevier Science Publishers, 1989), Organic Reactions, Volumes 1-40 (John Wiley and Sons, 1991), March's Advanced Organic Chemistry, (John Wiley and Sons, 4th Edition), and Larock's Comprehensive Organic Transformations (VCH Publishers Inc., 1989). The starting materials and the intermediates of the reaction may be isolated and purified if desired using conventional techniques, including but not limited to filtration, distillation, crystallization, chromatography, and the like. Such materials may be characterized using conventional means, including physical constants and spectral data. Furthermore, it will be appreciated that where typical or preferred process conditions (i.e., reaction temperatures, times, mole ratios of reactants, solvents, pressures, etc.) are given, other process conditions can also be used unless otherwise stated. Optimum reaction conditions may vary with the particular reactants or solvent used, but such conditions can be determined by one skilled in the art by routine optimization procedures.
Additionally, as will be apparent to those skilled in the art, conventional protecting groups may be necessary to prevent certain functional groups from undergoing undesired reactions. The choice of a suitable protecting group for a particular functional group as well as suitable conditions for protection and deprotection are well known in the art. For example, numerous protecting groups, and their introduction and removal, are described in T. W. Greene and G. M. Wuts, Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis, Second Edition, Wiley, New York, 1991 , and references cited therein. These schemes are merely illustrative of some methods by which the compounds of this invention can be synthesized, and various modifications to these schemes can be made and will be suggested to one skilled in the art having referred to this disclosure.
Preparation of a multibinding compound of Formula (I)
Synthesis of a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (I) is illustrated and described in Schemes A and B below.
A bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (I) wherein both the ligands are identical and are selected from a compound of formula (a), R' is hydrogen and and R2 is hydrogen or alkyl can also be prepared as shown in Scheme A below.
Scheme A
Figure imgf000048_0001
1 2 3
Figure imgf000048_0002
* (i)
Treatment of a phenol of formula 1 where Ar1 is as defined in the Summary of the Invention with an epoxide of formula 2 where Y is a leaving group under nucleophilic substitution reaction condition such as halo (e.g., chloro, bromo. or iodo), in the presence of a strong base such as sodium hydroxide provides an epoxide of formula 3. Alternatively, a compound of formula 3 can be prepared by the procedures described in D. Pelaprat, et al, J. Med. Chem. 23. 1336, (1980); and H. Kizuka, et al., J. Med. Chem. 30, 722, (1987).
Phenols of formula 1 are either commercially available or they can be prepared by methods well known in the art. For example, phenol, 2-cyanophenol, 2-allyloxyphenol, 2-chloro-5-methylphenol, 3-pyridinol, 1-napthol and 4- hydroxyindole are commercially available. 4-Hydroxy-3-methyl- sulfonamidophenol can be prepared by the literature procedure described in L. J. Beeley, et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 7. 219-224, (1997), 2-formylamino-5- hydroxy-1-methylimidazole can be prepared by the literature procedure described in Ing, J. Chem. Soc. 1932, 2047), 6-iodo-3-pyridinol can be prepared by the literature procedure described in K. Edgar, et al.. J. Org. Chem. 55, 5287- 5291(1990), 6-amino-3-pyridinol can be prepared by the literature procedure described in M. Moore, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 81, 6049-6054, (1959), 6-isopropyl-3- pyridinol can be prepared by the literature procedure described in N. Clauson-Kaas, Ada. Chem. Scand. 9, 14(1955), 2-formylamino-4-hydroxythiazole can be prepared by the literature procedure described in M. King, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 71, 368(1949), 5,6.7,8-tetrahydro-l,6,7-trihydroxynapthalene can be prepared by the literature procedure described in DE 2130393, 8-hydroxybenzotetrahydrothiopyran can be prepared by the literature procedure described in T. Schaefer, et al., Can J. Chem. 65, 908-914, (1987), 2-cyano-4-hydroxy indole can be prepared by the literature procedure described in R. Adams, et al, Synth. Commun. 21, 675-681(1991), 5- hydroxycarbazole can be prepared by the literature procedure described in T. Cummins, J. Chem. Soc. 3475, (1955), 5-hydroxy-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroquinolin-2-one can be prepared by the literature procedure described in T. Nishi, et al., Chem. Pharm. Bull. Jpn. 31, 798-810, (1983), 5-hydroxyquinolin-2-one can be prepared by the literature procedure described in T. Nishi, et al., Chem. Pharm. Bull. Jpn. 31, 852-860, (1983), and 4-hydroxybenzimidazol-2-one can be prepared by the literature procedure described in DE 2819458, 1978.
Treatment of 3 with a diamine of formula 4 under the reaction conditions described in J. Pitha, et al., J. Med. Chem. 26, 1, (1983); and H. Kizuka, et al, J Med. Chem., 30, 722, (1987) provides a compound of Formula (I).
Alternatively, a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (I) can be prepared by covalently attaching the ligands, L. to a linker, X, as shown in Scheme B below.
Scheme B Method ( )
FG1
2 L- FG -FG' - X-
Method (b)
Figure imgf000049_0001
[intermediate] (II) deprotect
Figure imgf000049_0002
In method (a), a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (I) is prepared in one step, by covalently attaching the ligands, L, to a linker, X, where FG1 and FG2 represent a functional group such as halo, amino, hydroxy. thio, aldehyde, ketone, carboxy, carboxy derivati > es such as acid halide, ester, amido, and the like. This method is preferred for preparing compounds of Formula (I) where both the ligands are identical.
In method (b), the compounds of Formula (I) are prepared in a stepwise manner by covalently attaching one equivalent of a ligand, L,, with a ligand X where where FG' and FG2 represent a functional group as defined above, and FG2PG is a protected functional group to give an intermediate of formula (II). Deprotection of the second functional group in (II), followed by reaction with a ligand L2, which may be same or different than ligand L,, then provides a compound of Formula (I). This method is suitable for preparing compounds of Formula (I) where the ligands are the non-identical.
The ligands are covalently attached to the linker using conventional chemical techniques providing for covalent linkage of the ligand to the linker. Reaction chemistries resulting in such linkages are well known in the art and involve the use of complementary functional groups on the linker and ligand as shown in Table I below.
Table I Representative Complementary Binding Chemistries
First Reactive Group Second Reactive Group Linkage carboxyl amine amide sulfonyl halide amine sulfonamide hydroxyl alkyl/aryl halide ether hydroxyl isocyanate urethane amine epoxide β-hydroxyamine amine alkyl/aryl halide alkylamine hydroxyl carboxyl ester amine aldehyde amine
Reaction between a carboxylic acid of either the linker or the ligand and a primary or secondary amine of the ligand or the linker in the presence of suitable, well-known activating agents such as dicyclohexylcarbodiimide. results in formation of an amide bond covalently linking the ligand to the linker; reaction between an amine group of either the linker or the ligand and a sulfonyl halide of the ligand or the linker, in the presence of a base such as triethylamine, pyridine, an the like results in formation of a sulfonamide bond covalently linking the ligand to the linker; and reaction between an alcohol or phenol group of either the linker or the ligand and an alkyl or aryl halide of the ligand or the linker in the presence of a base such as triethylamine, pyridine, and the like, results in formation of an ether bond covalently linking the ligand to the linker. A ligand of formula (a) where R1 and R2 are hydrogen can be readily prepared by treating a compound of formula 3 with ammonia. The reaction is carried out in an inert organic solvent such ethanol.
Ligands of formula (b) can be prepared by methods well known in the art ((e.g., see Ruffolo, R. R. Jr., et al. J. Med. Chem., 38, 3681 -3716, (1995) and Hieble, J. P., et al. J. Med. Chem., 38, 3415-3444, (1995))
Syntheses of compounds of Formula (I) via Schemes A and B are illustrated in Figures 5-16 and described in detail in Examples 1-12 below.
Any compound which binds to β3 adrenergic receptor can be used as a ligand in this invention provided that the multibinding compound of the Formula (I) acts as a β3 agonist. Typically, a compound selected for use as a ligand will have at least one functional group, such as an amino, hydroxyl, thiol or carboxyl group and the like, which allows the compound to be readily coupled to the linker. Compounds having such functionality are either known in the art or can be prepared by routine modification of known compounds using conventional reagents and procedures.
Linkers can be attached to different positions on the ligand molecule to achieve different orientations of the ligand domains, and thereby facilitate multivalency. While a number of positions on β3-adrenergic-modulating ligands are synthetically practical for linking, it is preferred to preserve those ligand substructures which are most important for ligand-receptor binding. At present, the 53 __5Q__ PCT/TJS99/12907
sidechain nitrogen in the ligand of formula (a) and the aryls groups (Ar and Ar3) in the ligand of formula (b) are preferred points of attachment.
It will be apparent to one skilled in the art that the above chemistries are not limited to preparing bivalent multibinding compounds of Formula (I) and can be used to prepare tri-, tetra-, etc., multibinding compounds of Formula (I).
The linker is attached to the ligand at a position that retains ligand domain- ligand binding site interaction and specifically which permits the ligand domain of the ligand to orient itself to bind to the ligand binding site. Such positions and synthetic protocols for linkage are well known in the art. The term linker embraces everything that is not considered to be part of the ligand.
The relative orientation in which the ligand domains are displayed derives from the particular point or points of attachment of the ligands to the linker, and on the framework geometry. The determination of where acceptable substitutions can be made on a ligand is typically based on prior knowledge of structure-activity relationships (SAR) of the ligand and/or congeners and/or structural information about ligand-receptor complexes (e.g., X-ray crystallography, NMR, and the like). Such positions and the synthetic methods for covalent attachment are well known in the art. Following attachment to the selected linker (or attachment to a significant portion of the linker, for example 2-10 atoms of the linker), the univalent linker-ligand conjugate may be tested for retention of activity in the relevant assay.
The linker, when covalently attached to multiple copies of the ligands, provides a biocompatible, substantially non-immunogenic multibinding compound. The biological activity of the multibinding compound is highly sensitive to the valency, geometry, composition, size, flexibility or rigidity, etc. of the linker and, in turn, on the overall structure of the multibinding compound, as well as the presence or absence of anionic or cationic charge, the relative hydrophobicity /hydrophilicity of the linker, and the like on the linker. Accordingly, the linker is preferably chosen to maximize the biological activity of the multibinding compound. The linker may be chosen to enhance the biological activity of the molecule. In general, the linker may be chosen from any organic molecule construct that orients two or more ligands to their ligand binding sites to permit multivalency. In this regard, the linker can be considered as a "framework" on which the ligands are arranged in order to bring about the desired ligand-orienting result, and thus produce a multibinding compound. For example, different orientations can be achieved by including in the framework groups containing mono- or polycyclic groups, including aryl and/or heteroaryl groups, or structures incoφorating one or more carbon-carbon multiple bonds (alkenyl, alkenylene, alkynyl or alkynylene groups). Other groups can also include oligomers and polymers which are branched- or straight-chain species. In preferred embodiments, rigidity is imparted by the presence of cyclic groups (e.g., aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, etc.). In other preferred embodiments, the ring is a six or ten member ring. In still further preferred embodiments, the ring is an aromatic ring such as, for example, phenyl or naphthyl.
Different hydrophobic/hydrophilic characteristics of the linker as well as the presence or absence of charged moieties can readily be controlled by the skilled artisan. For example, the hydrophobic nature of a linker derived from hexamethylene diamine (H2N(CH2)6NH2) or related polyamines can be modified to be substantially more hydrophilic by replacing the alkylene group with a poly(oxyalkylene) group such as found in the commercially available "Jeffamines". Different frameworks can be designed to provide preferred orientations of the ligands. Such frameworks may be represented by using an array of dots (as shown below) wherein each dot may potentially be an atom, such as C, O, N, S, P, H, F, Cl, Br, and F or the dot may alternatively indicate the absence of an atom at that position. To facilitate the understanding of the framework structure, the framework is illustrated as a two dimensional array in the following diagram, although clearly the framework is a three dimensional array in practice: 8
7
6
5 4
3 2
1 0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Each dot is either an atom, chosen from carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus, or halogen, or the dot represents a point in space (i.e., an absence of an atom). As is apparent to the skilled artisan, only certain atoms on the grid have the ability to act as an attachment point for the ligands, namely, C, O, N, S and P.
Atoms can be connected to each other via bonds (single, double or triple bonds with acceptable resonance and tautomeric forms), with regard to the usual constraints of chemical bonding. Ligands may be attached to the framework via single, double or triple bonds (with chemically acceptable tautomeric and resonance forms). Multiple ligand groups (2 to 10) can be attached to the framework such that the minimal, shortest path distance between adjacent ligand groups does not exceed 100 atoms. Preferably, the linker connections to the ligand is selected such that the maximum spatial distance between two adjacent ligands is no more than 100A. An example of a linker as presented by the grid is shown below for a biphenyl construct.
Figure imgf000055_0001
Nodes (1,2), (2,0), (4,4), (5,2), (4.0), (6,2), (7,4), (9,4). (10.2), (9,0), (7,0) all represent carbon atoms. Node ( 10,0) represents a chlorine atom. All other nodes (or dots) are points in space (i.e., represent an absence of atoms).
Nodes (1,2) and (9,4) are attachment points. Hydrogen atoms are affixed to nodes (2,4), (4,4), (4.0), (2,0), (7,4), (10,2) and (7,0). Nodes (5.2) and (6,2) are connected by a single bond.
The carbon atoms present are connected by either a single or double bonds, taking into consideration the principle of resonance and/or tautomerism.
The intersection of the framework (linker) and the ligand group, and indeed, the framework (linker) itself can have many different bonding patterns. Examples of acceptable patterns of three contiguous atom arrangements are shown in the following diagram:
ccc NCC occ sec PΓΓ
CCN NCN OCN SCN PC N
CCO NCO OCO SCO pen
CCS NCS OCS SCS PCS
CCP NCP OCP SCP PCP
CNC NNC ONC SNC PNC
CNN NNN ONN SNN PMN
CNO NNO ONO S Tϋ P NO
CNS NNS O ΓS" SNS PNS
CNP TF ON P SNP PN P
Figure imgf000056_0001
One skilled in the art would be able to identify bonding patterns that would produce multivalent compounds. Methods for producing these bonding arrangements are described in March, "Advanced Organic Chemistry", 4th Edition, Wiley-Interscience, New York, New York (1992). These arrangements are described in the grid of dots shown in the scheme above. All of the possible arrangements for the five most preferred atoms are shown. Each atom has a variety of acceptable oxidation states. The bonding arrangements underlined are less acceptable and are not preferred.
Examples of molecular structures in which the above bonding patterns could be employed as components of the linker are shown below.
Figure imgf000057_0001
The identification of an appropriate framework geometry and size for ligand domain presentation are important steps in the construction of a multibinding compound with enhanced activity. Systematic spatial searching strategies can be used to aid in the identification of preferred frameworks through an iterative process. Figure 4 illustrates a useful strategy for determining an optimal framework display orientation for ligand domains. Various other strategies are known to those skilled in the art of molecular design and can be used for preparing compounds of this invention.
As shown in Figure 1 , display vectors around similar central core structures such as a phenyl structure (Panel A) and a cyclohexane structure (Panel B) can be varied, as can the spacing of the ligand domain from the core structure (i.e., the length of the attaching moiety). It is to be noted that core structures other than those shown here can be used for determining the optimal framework display orientation of the ligands. The process may require the use of multiple copies of the same central core structur or combinations of different types of display cores.
The above-described process can be extended to trimers (Figure 2) and compound of higher valency (Figures 3 and 4). Assays of each of the individual compounds of a collection generated as described above will lead to a subset of compounds with the desired enhanced activities (e.g., potency, selectivity, etc.). The analysis of this subset using a technique such as Ensemble Molecular Dynamics will provide a framework orientation that favors the properties desired. A wide diversity of linkers is commercially available (see, e.g., Available Chemical Directory (ACD)). Many of the linkers that are suitable for use in this invention fall into this category. Other can be readily synthesized by methods well known in the art and/or are described below.
Having selected a preferred framework geometry, the physical properties of the linker can be optimized by varying the chemical composition thereof. The composition of the linker can be varied in numerous ways to achieve the desired physical properties for the multibinding compound.
It can therefore be seen that there is a plethora of possibilities for the composition of a linker. Examples of linkers include aliphatic moieties, aromatic moieties, steroidal moieties, peptides, and the like. Specific examples are peptides or polyamides, hydrocarbons, aromatic groups, ethers, lipids, cationic or anionic groups, or a combination thereof.
Examples are given below, but it should be understood that various changes may be made and equivalents may be substituted without departing from the true spirit and scope of the invention. For example, properties of the linker can be modified by the addition or insertion of ancillary groups into or onto the linker, for example, to change the solubility of the multibinding compound (in water, fats, lipids, biological fluids, etc.), hydrophobicity, hydrophilicity, linker flexibility, antigenicity, stability, and the like. For example, the introduction of one or more poly(ethylene glycol) (PEG) groups onto or into the linker enhances the hydrophilicity and water solubility of the multibinding compound, increases both molecular weight and molecular size and, depending on the nature of the unPEGylated linker, may increase the in vivo retention time. Further PEG may decrease antigenicity and potentially enhances the overall rigidity of the linker. Ancillary groups which enhance the water solubility /hydrophilicity of the linker and, accordingly, the resulting multibinding compounds are useful in practicing this invention. Thus, it is within the scope of the present invention to use ancillary groups such as, for example, small repeating units of ethylene glycols, alcohols, polyols (e.g., glycerin, glycerol propoxylate, saccharides, including mono- , oligosaccharides, etc.), carboxylates (e.g., small repeating units of glutamic acid. acrylic acid, etc.), amines (e.g., tetraethylenepentamine), and the like) to enhance the water solubility and/or hydrophilicity of the multibinding compounds of this invention. In preferred embodiments, the ancillary group used to improve water solubility/hydrophilicity will be a polyether .
The incorporation of lipophilic ancillary groups within the structure of the linker to enhance the lipophilicity and/or hydrophobicity of the multibinding compounds described herein is also within the scope of this invention. Lipophilic groups useful with the linkers of this invention include, by way of example only, aryl and heteroaryl groups which, as above, may be either unsubstituted or substituted with other groups, but are at least substituted with a group which allows their covalent attachment to the linker. Other lipophilic groups useful with the linkers of this invention include fatty acid derivatives which do not form bilayers in aqueous medium until higher concentrations are reached.
Also within the scope of this invention is the use of ancillary groups which result in the multibinding compound being incoφorated or anchored into a vesicle or other membranous structure such as a liposome or a micelle. The term "lipid" refers to any fatty acid derivative that is capable of forming a bilayer or a micelle such that a hydrophobic portion of the lipid material orients toward the bilayer while a hydrophilic portion orients toward the aqueous phase. Hydrophilic characteristics derive from the presence of phosphato, carboxylic, sulfato, amino, sulfhydryl, nitro and other like groups well known in the art. Hydrophobicity could be conferred by the inclusion of groups that include, but are not limited to, long chain saturated and unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon groups of up to 20 carbon atoms and such groups substituted by one or more aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, and/or heterocyclic group(s). Preferred lipids are phosphglycerides and sphingolipids, representative examples of which include phosphatidylcholine, phosphatidylethanolamine, phosphatidylserine, phosphatidylinositol, phosphatidic acid, palmitoyleoyl phosphatidylcholine, lysophosphatidylcholine, lysophosphatidyl -ethanolamine, dipalmitoylphosphatidylcholine, dioleoylphosphatidylcholine. distearoyl- phosphatidylcholine or dilinoleoylphosphatidylcholine could be used. Other compounds lacking phosphorus, such as sphingolipid and glycosphingolipid families are also within the group designated as lipid. Additionally, the amphipathic lipids described above may be mixed with other lipids including triglycerides and sterols.
The flexibility of the linker can be manipulated by the inclusion of ancillary groups which are bulky and/or rigid. The presence of bulky or rigid groups can hinder free rotation about bonds in the linker or bonds between the linker and the ancillary group(s) or bonds between the linker and the functional groups. Rigid groups can include, for example, those groups whose conformational lability is restrained by the presence of rings and/or multiple bonds within the group, for example, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, and heterocyclic groups. Other groups which can impart rigidity include polypeptide groups such as oligo- or polyproline chains.
Rigidity can also be imparted electrostatically. Thus, if the ancillary groups are either positively or negatively charged, the similarly charged ancillary groups will force the presenter linker into a configuration affording the maximum distance between each of the like charges. The energetic cost of bringing the like-charged groups closer to each other will tend to hold the linker in a configuration that maintains the separation between the like-charged ancillary groups. Further ancillary groups bearing opposite charges will tend to be attracted to their oppositely charged counteφarts and potentially may enter into both inter- and intramolecular ionic bonds. This non-covalent mechanism will tend to hold the linker into a conformation which allows bonding between the oppositely charged groups. The addition of ancillary groups which are charged, or alternatively, bear a latent charge when deprotected, following addition to the linker, include deprotectation of a carboxyl, hydroxyl, thiol or amino group by a change in pH, oxidation, reduction or other mechanisms known to those skilled in the art which result in removal of the protecting group, is within the scope of this invention. Rigidity may also be imparted by internal hydrogen bonding or by hydrophobic collapse.
Bulky groups can include, for example, large atoms, ions (e.g., iodine, sulfur, metal ions, etc.) or groups containing large atoms, polycyclic groups, including aromatic groups, non-aromatic groups and structures incoφorating one or more carbon-carbon multiple bonds (i.e., alkenes and alkynes). Bulky groups can also include oligomers and polymers which are branched- or straight-chain species. Species that are branched are expected to increase the rigidity of the structure more per unit molecular weight gain than are straight-chain species. In preferred embodiments, rigidity is imparted by the presence of cyclic groups (e.g., aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic. etc.). In other preferred embodiments, the linker comprises one or more six-membered rings. In still further preferred embodiments, the ring is an aryl group such as. for example, phenyl or naphthyl. In view of the above, it is apparent that the appropriate selection of a linker group providing suitable orientation, restricted/unrestricted rotation, the desired degree of hydrophobicity/hydrophilicity, etc. is well within the skill of the art. Eliminating or reducing antigenicity of the multibinding compounds described herein is also within the scope of this invention. In certain cases, the antigenicity of a multibinding compound may be eliminated or reduced by use of groups such as. for example, poly(ethylene glycol).
As explained above, the multibinding compounds described herein comprise 2-10 ligands attached to a linker that attaches the ligands in such a manner that they are presented to the enzyme for multivalent interactions with ligand binding sites thereon/therein. The linker spatially constrains these interactions to occur within dimensions defined by the linker. This and other factors increases the biological activity of the multibinding compound as compared to the same number of ligands made available in monobinding form.
The compounds of this invention are preferably represented by the empirical Formula (L)p(X)q where L, X, p and q are as defined above. This is intended to include the several ways in which the ligands can be linked together in order to achieve the objective of multivalency, and a more detailed explanation is described below.
As noted previously, the linker may be considered as a framework to which ligands are attached. Thus, it should be recognized that the ligands can be attached at any suitable position on this framework, for example, at the termini of a linear chain or at any intermediate position.
The simplest and most preferred multibinding compound is a bivalent compound which can be represented as L-X-L, where each L is independently a ligand which may be the same or different and each X is independently the linker. Examples of such bivalent compounds are provided in FIG. 1 where each shaded circle represents a ligand. A trivalent compound could also be represented in a linear fashion, i.e., as a sequence of repeated units L-X-L-X-L, in which L is a ligand and is the same or different at each occurrence, as can X. However, a trimer can also be a radial multibinding compound comprising three ligands attached to a central core, and thus represented as (L)3X, where the linker X could include, for example, an aryl or cycloalkyl group. Illustrations of trivalent and tetravalent compounds of this invention are found in FIG.s 2 and 3 respectively where, again, the shaded circles represent ligands. Tetravalent compounds can be represented in a linear array, e.g., L-X-L-X-L-X-L
in a branched array, e.g.,
L-X-L-X-L (a branched construct analogous to the isomers of butane — «-butyl, .so-butyl, sec- butyl, and t-butyl) or in a tetrahedral array, e.g.,
X
/
'L
where X and L are as defined herein. Alternatively, it could be represented as an alkyl, aryl or cycloalkyl derivative as above with four (4) ligands attached to the core linker.
The same considerations apply to higher multibinding compounds of this invention containing 5-10 ligands as illustrated in FIG. 4 where, as before, the shaded circles represent ligands. However, for multibinding agents attached to a central linker such as aryl or cycloalkyl. there is a self-evident constraint that there must be sufficient attachment sites on the linker to accommodate the number of ligands present; for example, a benzene ring could not directly accommodate more than 6 ligands, whereas a multi-ring linker (e.g., biphenyl) could accommodate a larger number of ligands.
Certain of the above described compounds may alternatively be represented as cyclic chains of the form:
X X
and variants thereof.
All of the above variations are intended to be within the scope of the invention defined by the Formula (L)p(X)q. With the foregoing in mind, a preferred linker may be represented by the following formula:
-Xa-Z-(Ya-Z)m-Xa- wherein: m is an integer of from 0 to 20;
Xa at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -0-, -S-, -NR-, -C(O)-, -C(0)0-, -OC(O)-, -C(0)NR-, -NRC(O)-. C(S), -C(S)0-, -C(S)NR-, -NRC(S)-, or a covalent bond where R is as defined below;
Z at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of alkylene, substituted alkylene, cycloalkylene, substituted cylcoalkylene, alkenylene, substituted alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylene, cycloalkenylene, substituted cycloalkenylene, arylene, heteroarylene, heterocyclene, or a covalent bond; each Ya at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -0-, -C(O)-, -OC(O)-. -C(0)0-, -NR-, -S(0)n-, -C(0)NR"-. -NR'C(O)-, - NR'C(0)NR'-, -NR'C(S)NR'-, -C(=NR')-NR\ -NR'-C(=NR , -OC(0)-NR'-, - NR'-C(O)-0-, -N=C(Xa)-NR'-, -NR'-C(Xa)=N-.-P(0)(OR')-0-, -0-P(0)(OR . - S(0)nCR' R"-, -S(0)n-NR'-, -NR'-S(0)n -, and a covalent bond: where n is 0, 1 or 2; and R, R' and R" at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl. substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic. Additionally, the linker moiety can be optionally substituted at any atom therein by one or more alkyl, substituted alkyl. cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl. aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic group.
In view of the above description of the linker, it is understood that the term "linker" when used in combination with the term ''multibinding compound" includes both a covalently contiguous single linker (e.g., L-X-L) and multiple covalently non-contiguous linkers (L-X-L-X-L) within the multibinding compound.
Combinatorial Libraries The methods described above lend themselves to combinatorial approaches for identifying multimeric compounds which possess multibinding properties. Specifically, factors such as the proper juxtaposition of the individual ligands of a multibinding compound with respect to the relevant array of binding sites on a target or targets is important in optimizing the interaction of the multibinding compound with its target(s) and to maximize the biological advantage through multivalency. One approach is to identify a library of candidate multibinding compounds with properties spanning the multibinding parameters that are relevant for a particular target. These parameters include: (1) the identity of ligand(s), (2) the orientation of ligands, (3) the valency of the construct, (4) linker length, (5) linker geometry, (6) linker physical properties, and (7) linker chemical functional groups.
Libraries of multimeric compounds potentially possessing multibinding properties (i.e., candidate multibinding compounds) and comprising a multiplicity of such variables are prepared and these libraries are then evaluated via conventional assays corresponding to the ligand selected and the multibinding parameters desired. Considerations relevant to each of these variables are set forth below: Selection of ligand(s :
A single ligand or set of ligands is (are) selected for incoφoration into the libraries of candidate multibinding compounds which library is directed against a particular biological target or targets e.g., β3 adrenergic receptor. The only requirement for the ligands chosen is that they are capable of interacting with the selected target(s). Thus, ligands may be known drugs, modified forms of known drugs, substructures of known drugs or substrates of modified forms of known drugs (which are competent to interact with the target), or other compounds. Ligands are preferably chosen based on known favorable properties that may be projected to be carried over to or amplified in multibinding forms. Favorable properties include demonstrated safety and efficacy in human patients, appropriate PK ADME profiles, synthetic accessibility, and desirable physical properties such as solubility, log P, etc. However, it is crucial to note that ligands which display an unfavorable property from among the previous list may obtain a more favorable property through the process of multibinding compound formation; i.e., ligands should not necessarily be excluded on such a basis. For example, a ligand that is not sufficiently potent at a part'cular target so as to be efficacious in a human patient may become highly potent and efficacious when presented in multibinding form. A ligand that is potent and efficacious but not of utility because of a non- mechanism-related toxic side effect may have increased therapeutic index
(increased potency relative to toxicity) as a multibinding compound. Compounds that exhibit short in vivo half-lives may have extended half-lives as multibinding compounds. Physical properties of ligands that limit their usefulness (e.g. poor bioavailability due to low solubility, hydrophobicity, hydrophilicity) may be rationally modulated in multibinding forms, providing compounds with physical properties consistent with the desired utility. Orientation: selection of ligand attachment points and linking chemistry:
Several points are chosen on each ligand at which to attach the ligand to the linker. The selected points on the ligand/linker for attachment are functionalized to contain complementary reactive functional groups. This permits probing the effects of presenting the ligands to their receptor(s) in multiple relative orientations, an important multibinding design parameter. The only requirement for choosing attachment points is that attaching to at least one of these points does not abrogate activity of the ligand. Such points for attachment can be identified by structural information when available. For example, inspection of a co-crystal structure of a protease inhibitor bound to its target allows one to identify one or more sites where linker attachment will not preclude the enzyme:inhibitor interaction. Alternatively, evaluation of ligand/target binding by nuclear magnetic resonance will permit the identification of sites non-essential for ligand/target binding. See, for example, Fesik, et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,891,643. When such structural information is not available, utilization of structure-activity relationships (SAR) for ligands will suggest positions where substantial structural variations are and are not allowed. In the absence of both structural and SAR information, a library is merely selected with multiple points of attachment to allow presentation of the ligand in multiple distinct orientations. Subsequent evaluation of this library will indicate what positions are suitable for attachment. It is important to emphasize that positions of attachment that do abrogate the activity of the monomeric ligand may also be advantageously included in candidate multibinding compounds in the library provided that such compounds bear at least one ligand attached in a manner which does not abrogate intrinsic activity. This selection derives from, for example, heterobivalent interactions within the context of a single target molecule. For example, consider a receptor antagonist ligand bound to its target receptor, and then consider modifying this ligand by attaching to it a second copy of the same ligand with a linker which allows the second ligand to interact with the same receptor molecule at sites proximal to the antagonist binding site, which include elements of the receptor that are not part of the formal antagonist binding site and/or elements of the matrix surrounding the receptor such as the membrane. Here, the most favorable orientation for interaction of the second ligand molecule with the receptor/matrix may be achieved by attaching it to the linker at a position which abrogates activity of the ligand at the formal antagonist binding site. Another way to consider this is that the SAR of individual ligands within the context of a multibinding structure is often different from the SAR of those same ligands in momomeric form.
The foregoing discussion focused on bivalent interactions of dimeric compounds bearing two copies of the same ligand joined to a single linker through different attachment points, one of which may abrogate the binding/activity of the monomeric ligand. It should also be understood that bivalent advantage may also be attained with heterodimeric constructs bearing two different ligands that bind to common or different targets. For example, a 5HT, receptor antagonist and a bladder-selective muscarinic M3 antagonist may be joined to a linker through attachment points which do not abrogate the binding affinity of the monomeric ligands for their respective receptor sites. The dimeric compound may achieve enhanced affinity for both receptors due to favorable interactions between the 5HT4 ligand and elements of the M3 receptor proximal to the formal M3 antagonist binding site and between the M3 ligand and elements of the 5HT4 receptor proximal to the formal 5HT antagonist binding site. Thus, the dimeric compound may be more potent and selective antagonist of overactive bladder and a superior therapy for urinary urge incontinence.
Once the ligand attachment points have been chosen, one identifies the types of chemical linkages that are possible at those points. The most preferred types of chemical linkages are those that are compatible with the overall structure of the ligand (or protected forms of the ligand) readily and generally formed, stable and intrinsically inocuous under typical chemical and physiological conditions, and compatible with a large number of available linkers. Amide bonds, ethers, amines, carbamates, ureas, and sulfonamides are but a few examples of preferred linkages. Linkers: spanning relevant multibinding parameters through selection of valency, linker length, linker geometry, rigidity, physical properties, and chemical functional groups
In the library of linkers employed to generate the library of candidate multibinding compounds, the selection of linkers employed in this library of linkers takes into consideration the following factors: Valency:
In most instances the library of linkers is initiated with divalent linkers. The choice of ligands and proper juxtaposition of two ligands relative to their binding sites permits such molecules to exhibit target binding affinities and specificities more than sufficient to confer biological advantage. Furthermore, divalent linkers or constructs are also typically of modest size such that they retain the desirable biodistribution properties of small molecules. Linker length:
Linkers are chosen in a range of lengths to allow the spanning of a range of inter-ligand distances that encompass the distance preferable for a given divalent interaction. In some instances the preferred distance can be estimated rather precisely from high-resolution structural information of targets, typically enzymes and soluble receptor targets. In other instances where high-resolution structural information is not available (such as 7TM G-protein coupled receptors), one can make use of simple models to estimate the maximum distance between binding sites either on adjacent receptors or at different locations on the same receptor. In situations where two binding sites are present on the same target (or target subunit for multisubunit targets), preferred linker distances are 2-20 Λ, with more preferred linker distances of 3-12 A. In situations where two binding sites reside on separate (e.g., protein) target sites, preferred linker distances are 20-100 A, with more preferred distances of 30-70 A. Linker geometry and rigidity:
The combination of ligand attachment site, linker length, linker geometry, and linker rigidity determine the possible ways in which the ligands of candidate multibinding compounds may be displayed in three dimensions and thereby presented to their binding sites. Linker geometry and rigidity are nominally determined by chemical composition and bonding pattern, which may be controlled and are systematically varied as another spanning function in a multibinding array. For example, linker geometry is varied by attaching two ligands to the ortho. meta. and para positions of a benzene ring, or in cis- or tn s-arrangements at the 1,1- vs. 1,2- vs. 1,3- vs. 1,4- positions around a cyclohexane core or in cis- or trans- arrangements at a point of ethylene unsaturation. Linker rigidity is varied by controlling the number and relative energies of different conformational states possible for the linker. For example, a divalent compound bearing two ligands joined by 1 ,8-octyl linker has many more degrees of freedom, and is therefore less rigid than a compound in which the two ligands are attached to the 4,4' positions of a biphenyl linker. Linker physical properties:
The physical properties of linkers are nominally determined by the chemical constitution and bonding patterns of the linker, and linker physical properties impact the overall physical properties of the candidate multibinding compounds in which they are included. A range of linker compositions is typically selected to provide a range of physical properties (hydrophobicity, hydrophilicity, amphiphilicity, polarization, acidity, and basicity) in the candidate multibinding compounds. The particular choice of linker physical properties is made within the context of the physical properties of the ligands they join and preferably the goal is to generate molecules with favorable PK/ADME properties. For example, linkers can be selected to avoid those that are too hydrophilic or too hydrophobic to be readily absorbed and/or distributed in vivo. Linker chemical functional groups:
Linker chemical functional groups are selected to be compatible with the chemistry chosen to connect linkers to the ligands and to impart the range of physical properties sufficient to span initial examination of this parameter.
Combinatorial synthesis: Having chosen a set of n ligands (n being determined by the sum of the number of different attachment points for each ligand chosen) and m linkers by the process outlined above, a library of (n\)m candidate divalent multibinding compounds is prepared which spans the relevant multibinding design parameters for a particular target. For example, an array generated from two ligands, one which has two attachment points (Al , A2) and one which has three attachment points (Bl, B2, B3) joined in all possible combinations provide for at least 15 possible combinations of multibinding compounds:
Al-Al A1-A2 Al-Bl A1-B2 A1-B3 A2-A2 A2-B1 A2-B2 A2-B3 Bl-Bl B1-B2 B1-B3 B2-B2 B2-B3 B3-B3
When each of these combinations is joined by 10 different linkers, a library of 150 candidate multibinding compounds results.
Given the combinatorial nature of the library, common chemistries are preferably used to join the reactive functionalies on the ligands with complementary reactive functionalities on the linkers. The library therefore lends itself to efficient parallel synthetic methods. The combinatorial library can employ solid phase chemistries well known in the art wherein the ligand and/or linker is attached to a solid support. Alternatively and preferably, the combinatorial libary is prepared in the solution phase. After synthesis, candidate multibinding compounds are optionally purified before assaying for activity by, for example, chromatographic methods (e.g., HPLC). Analysis of array by biochemical, analytical, pharmacological, and computational methods:
Various methods are used to characterize the properties and activities of the candidate multibinding compounds in the library to determine which compounds possess multibinding properties. Physical constants such as solubility under various solvent conditions and logD/clogD values can be determined. A combination of NMR spectroscopy and computational methods is used to determine low-energy conformations of the candidate multibinding compounds in fluid media. The ability of the members of the library to bind to the desired target and other targets is determined by various standard methods, which include radioligand displacement assays for receptor and ion channel targets, and kinetic inhibition analysis for many enzyme targets. In vitro efficacy, such as for receptor agonists and antagonists, ion channel blockers, and antimicrobial activity, can also be determined. Pharmacological data, including oral absoφtion, everted gut penetration, other pharmacokinetic parameters and efficacy data can be determined in appropriate models. In this way, key structure-activity relationships are obtained for multibinding design parameters which are then used to direct future work. The members of the library which exhibit multibinding properties, as defined herein, can be readily determined by conventional methods. First those members which exhibit multibinding properties are identified by conventional methods as described above including conventional assays (both in vitro and in vivo).
Second, ascertaining the structure of those compounds which exhibit multibinding properties can be accomplished via art recognized procedures. For example, each member of the library can be encrypted or tagged with appropriate information allowing determination of the structure of relevant members at a later time. See, for example. Dower, et al.. International Patent Application Publication No. WO 93/06121; Brenner, et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., USA, 89:5181 (1992); Gallop, et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,846,839: each of which are incoφorated herein by reference in its entirety. Alternatively, the structure of relevant multivalent compounds can also be determined from soluble and untagged libaries of candidate multivalent compounds by methods known in the art such as those described by Hindsgaul, et al., Canadian Patent Application No. 2,240,325 which was published on July 11, 1998. Such methods couple frontal affinity chromatography with mass spectroscopy to determine both the structure and relative binding affinities of candidate multibinding compounds to receptors.
The process set forth above for dimeric candidate multibinding compounds can, of course, be extended to trimeric candidate compounds and higher analogs thereof.
Follow-up synthesis and analysis of additional array(s'):
Based on the information obtained through analysis of the initial library, an optional component of the process is to ascertain one or more promising multibinding "lead" compounds as defined by particular relative ligand orientations, linker lengths, linker geometries, etc. Additional libraries can then be generated around these leads to provide for further information regarding structure to activity relationships. These arrays typically bear more focused variations in linker structure in an effort to further optimize target affinity and/or activity at the target (antagonism, partial agonism, etc.), and/or alter physical properties. By iterative redesign analysis using the novel principles of multibinding design along with classical medicinal chemistry, biochemistry, and pharmacology approaches, one is able to prepare and identify optimal multibinding compounds that exhibit biological advantage towards their targets and as therapeutic agents.
To further elaborate upon this procedure, suitable divalent linkers include, by way of example only, those derived from dicarboxylic acids, disulfonylhalides, dialdehydes, diketones, dihalides, diisocyanates,diamines, diols, mixtures of carboxylic acids, sulfonylhalides, aldehydes, ketones, halides, isocyanates. amines and diols. In each case, the carboxylic acid, sulfonylhalide, aldehyde, ketone, halide, isocyanate, amine and diol functional group is reacted with a complementary functionality on the ligand to form a covalent linkage. Such complementary functionality is well known in the art as illustrated in the following table: COMPLEMENTARY BINDING CHEMISTRIES
First Reactive Group Second Reactive Group Linkage hydroxyl isocyanate urethane amine epoxide β-hydroxyamine amine sulfonyl halide sulfonamide carboxyl acid amine amide hydroxyl alkyl/aryl halide ether aldehyde amine/NaCNBH3 amine ketone amine/NaCNBH3 amine amine isocyanate urea
Exemplary linkers include the following linkers identified as X-1 through 418 as set forth below:
Figure imgf000074_0001
Figure imgf000074_0002
Figure imgf000075_0001
-72c-
Figure imgf000076_0001
Figure imgf000077_0001
Figure imgf000077_0002
X-50
Figure imgf000077_0003
X-53 X-54
Figure imgf000077_0004
Figure imgf000078_0001
X-71 X-72 X-73
Figure imgf000078_0002
X-77 X-78
Figure imgf000078_0003
Figure imgf000079_0001
Figure imgf000080_0001
Figure imgf000080_0002
X-92
Figure imgf000080_0003
Figure imgf000081_0001
Figure imgf000081_0002
Figure imgf000081_0003
X-106
Figure imgf000081_0004
Figure imgf000082_0001
X-123 -73d- P
Figure imgf000083_0001
X-130 X-132
Figure imgf000083_0002
Figure imgf000083_0003
Figure imgf000084_0001
Figure imgf000085_0001
X-175
Br' 'Br Br' ■ Br
OH OH 8 X-179 X-180 -74b- PC
Figure imgf000086_0001
Diisocyanates
Figure imgf000087_0001
Figure imgf000088_0001
Figure imgf000089_0001
Diamines
Figure imgf000089_0002
Figure imgf000090_0001
Figure imgf000090_0002
Figure imgf000090_0003
Figure imgf000091_0001
X-285
HjC.
*/V' </V- CH H2N, NH
3
X-286 X-287
Figure imgf000091_0002
Figure imgf000092_0001
X-308 X-309
Figure imgf000092_0002
Figure imgf000092_0003
Figure imgf000093_0001
X-320
HjC^
^N ^CH H2N
3 'NH 2
X-321 X-322
Figure imgf000093_0002
X-323 X-324 X-325
Figure imgf000093_0003
WO 99/64053 -76b- PCT/US99/12907
Figure imgf000094_0001
X-333
Figure imgf000094_0002
X-335 X-336 X-337
Figure imgf000094_0003
X-344
Figure imgf000095_0001
X-346
Figure imgf000095_0002
OH
X-347 X-348 X-349
Figure imgf000095_0003
Figure imgf000096_0001
X-361
X-362
Figure imgf000096_0002
X-366
X-367
Figure imgf000096_0003
X-369
Figure imgf000096_0004
Figure imgf000097_0001
^ CH3
O OH HO' - o
-OH
X-379 X-380
Figure imgf000097_0002
X-381 X-382 X-383
Figure imgf000097_0003
X-385
Dithiols
Figure imgf000097_0004
X-386 X-387 X-388
SH
Figure imgf000097_0005
X-390
Figure imgf000098_0001
HS .SH HS^ SH HS
S X-407 X-408 X-409
Figure imgf000098_0002
Representative ligands for use in this invention include, by way of example, L-1 and L-2 as identified above wherein L-1 is selected from a compound of formula (a) and L-2 is selected from a compound of formula (b).
Combinations of ligands (L) and linkers (X) per this invention include, by way example only, homo- and hetero-dimers wherein a first ligand is selected from L-1 and the second ligand and linker is selected from the following:
L-l/X-l- L-l/X-2- L-l/X-3- L-l/X-4- L-l/X-5- L-l/X-6-
L-l/X-7- L-l/X-8- L-l/X-9- L-l/X-10- L-l/X-11- L-l/X-12-
L-l/X-13- L-l/X-14- L-l/X-15- L-l/X-16- L-l/X-17- L-l/X-18-
L-l/X-19- L-l/X-20- L-l/X-21- L-l/X-22- L-l/X-23- L-l/X-24-
L-l/X-25- L-l/X-26- L-l/X-27- L-l/X-28- L-l/X-29- L-l/X-30-
L-l/X-31- L-l/X-32- L-l/X-33- L-l/X-34- L-l/X-35- L-l/X-36-
L-l/X-37- L-l/X-38- L-l/X-39- L-l/X-40- L-l/X-41- L-l/X-42-
L-l/X-43- L-l/X-44- L-l/X-45- L-l/X-46- L-l/X-47- L-l/X-48-
L-l/X-49- L-l/X-50- L-l/X-51- L-l/X-52- L-l/X-53- L-l/X-54-
L-l/X-55- L-l/X-56- L-l/X-57- L-l/X-58- L-l/X-59- L-l/X-60-
L-l/X-61- L-l/X-62- L-l/X-63- L-l/X-64- L-l/X-65- L-l/X-66-
L-l/X-67- L-l/X-68- L-l/X-69- L-l/X-70- L-l/X-71- L-l/X-72-
L-l/X-73- L-l/X-74- L-l/X-75- L-l/X-76- L-l/X-77- L-l/X-78-
L-l/X-79- L-l/X-80- L-l/X-81- L-l/X-82- L-l/X-83- L-l/X-84-
L-l/X-85- L-l/X-86- L-l/X-87- L-l/X-88- L-l/X-89- L-l/X-90-
L-l/X-91- L-l/X-92- L-l/X-93- L-l/X-94- L-l/X-95- L-l/X-96-
L-l/X-97- L-l/X-98- L-l/X-99- L-l/X-100- L-l/X-101- L-l/X-102-
L-l/X-103- L-l/X-104- L-l/X-105- L-l/X-106- L-l/X-107- L-l/X-108-
L-l/X-109- L-l/X-110- L-l/X-111- L-l/X-112- L-l/X-113- L-l/X-114-
L-l/X-115- L-l/X-116- L-l/X-117- L-l/X-118- L-l/X-119- L-l/X-120-
L-l/X-121- L-l/X-122- L-l/X-123- L-l/X-1 4- L-1/X-125- L-l/X-126-
L-l/X-127- L-l/X-128- L-l/X-129- L-l/X-130- L-l/X-131- L-l/X-132-
L-l/X-133- L-l/X-134- L-l/X-135- L-l/X-136- L-l/X-137- L-l X-138-
L-l/X-139- L-l/X-140- L-l/X-141- L-l/X-142- L-1/X-143- L-l/X-144-
L-l/X-145- L-l/X-146- L-l/X-147- L-l/X-148- L-l/X-149- L-l/X-150-
L-l/X-151- L-l/X-152- L-l/X-153- L-l/X-154- L-l/X-155- L-l/X-156-
L-l/X-157- L-l/X-158- L-l/X-159- L-l/X-160- L-l/X-161- L-l/X-162-
L-l/X-163- L-l/X-164- L-l/X-165- L-l/X-166- L-l/X-167- L-l/X-168-
L-l/X-169- L-l/X-170- L-l/X-171- L-l/X-172- L-l/X-173- L-l/X-174- L-l/X-175- L-l/X-176- L-l'X-177- L-l/X-178-
L-l/X-179- L-l/X-180- L-l/X-181- L-l/X-182- L-l'X-183- L-l/X-184-
L-l/X-185- L-l/X-186- L-1 /X-187- L-1 /X-188- L- I X- 189- L-l/X-190-
L-l/X-191- L-l/X-192- L-l/X-193- L-l/X-194- L-l-X-195- L-l/X-196-
L-l/X-197- L-l/X-198- L-1 /X-199- L-l/X-200- L- X-201- L-l/X-202-
L-l/X-203- L-l/X-204- L-l/X-205- L-1 /X-206- L-1 'X-207- L-l/X-208-
L-l/X-209- L-l/X-210- L-l/X-211- L-l/X-212- L-l'X-213- L-l/X-214-
L-l/X-215- L-l/X-216- L-l/X-217- L-l/X-218- L-l X-219- L-l/X-220-
L-l/X-221- L-l/X-222- L-l/X-223- L-l/X-224- L-l/X-225- L-l/X-226-
L-l/X-227- L-l/X-228- L-l/X-229- L-l/X-230- L-l/X-231- L-l/X-232-
L-l/X-233- L-l/X-234- L-l/X-235- L-l/X-236- L-l'X-237- L-l/X-238-
L-l/X-239- L-l/X-240- L-l/X-241- L-l/X-242- L-l'X-243- L-l/X-244-
L-l/X-245- L-l/X-246- L-l/X-247- L-l/X-248- L-1 X-249- L-l/X-250-
L-l/X-251- L-l/X-252- L-1 /X-253- L-l/X-254- L-l'X-255- L-l/X-256-
L-l/X-257- L-l /X-258- L-l/X-259- L-l/X-260- L-l/X-261- L-l/X-262-
L-l/X-263- L-l/X-264- L-l/X-265- L-l/X-266- L-l'X-267- L-l/X-268-
L-l/X-269- L-l/X-270- L-l/X-271- L-l/X-272- L-l/X-273- L-l/X-274-
L-l/X-275- L-l/X-276- L-1 /X-277- L-l/X-278- L-l/X-279- L-l/X-280-
L-l/X-281- L-l/X-282- L-l/X-283- L-l/X-284- L-l/X-285- L-l/X-286-
L-l/X-287- L-l/X-288- L-l/X-289- L-l/X-290- L-L'X-291- L-l/X-292-
L-l/X-293- L-l/X-294- L-l/X-295- L-l/X-296- L-l/X-297- L-l/X-298-
L-l/X-299- L-l/X-300- L-l/X-301- L-l/X-302- L-l X-303- L-l/X-304-
L-l/X-305- L-l/X-306- L-l/X-307- L-l/X-308- L-L'X-309- L-l/X-310-
L-l/X-311- L-l/X-312- L-l/X-313- L-l/X-314- L-l/X-315- L-l/X-316-
L-l/X-317- L-l/X-318- L-l/X-319- L-l/X-320- L-L'X-321- L-l/X-322-
L-l/X-323- L-l/X-324- L-l/X-325- L-l/X-326- L-l/X-327- L-l/X-328-
L-l/X-329- L-l/X-330- L-l/X-331- L-l/X-332- L-l/X-333- L-l/X-334-
L-l/X-335- L-l/X-336- L-l/X-337- L-l/X-338- L-L'X-339- L-l/X-340-
L-l/X-341- L-l/X-342- L-l/X-343- L-l/X-344- L-l/X-345- L-l/X-346-
L-l/X-347- L-l/X-348- L-l/X-349- L-l/X-350- L-L'X-351- L-l/X-352-
L-l/X-353- L-l/X-354- L-l/X-355- L-l/X-356- L-l'X-357- L-l/X-358-
L-l/X-359- L-l/X-360- L-l/X-361- L-l/X-362- L-1 X-363- L-l/X-364-
L-l/X-365- L-l/X-366- L-l/X-367- L-l/X-368- L-l/X-369- L-l/X-370-
L-l/X-371- L-l/X-372- L-l/X-373- L-l/X-374- L-l/X-375- L-l/X-376-
L-l/X-377- L-l/X-378- L-l/X-379- L-l/X-380- L-l'X-381- L-l/X-382-
L-l/X-383- L-l/X-384- L-l/X-385- L-l/X-386- L-l/X-387- L-l/X-388-
L-l/X-389- L-l/X-390- L-l/X-391- L-l/X-392- L-l X-393- L-l/X-394- L-l/X-395- L-l/X-396- L-l/X-397- L-l/X-398- L-l/X-399- L-l/X-400- L-l/X-401- L-l/X-402- L 1 /X-403- L-l/X-404- L-l/X-405- L-l/X-406- L-l/X-407- L-l/X-408- L-l/X-409- L-l/X-410- L-l/X-411- L-l/X-412- L-l/X-413- L-l/X-414- L-l/X-415- L-l/X-416- L-l/X-417- L-l/X-418-
L-2/X-1- L-2/X-2- L-2/X-3- L-2/X-4- L-2/X-5- L-2/X-6-
L-2/X-7- L-2/X-8- L-2/X-9- L-2/X-10- L-2/X-11- L-2/X-12-
L-2/X-13- L-2/X-14- L-2/X-15- L-2/X-16- L-2/X-17- L-2/X-18-
L-2/X-19- L-2/X-20- L-2/X-21- L-2/X-22- L-2/X-23- L-2/X-24-
L-2/X-25- L-2/X-26- L-2/X-27- L-2/X-28- L-2/X-29- L-2/X-30-
L-2/X-31- L-2/X-32- L-2/X-33- L-2/X-34- L-2/X-35- L-2/X-36-
L-2/X-37- L-2/X-38- L-2/X-39- L-2/X-40- L-2/X-41- L-2/X-42-
L-2/X-43- L-2/X-44- L-2/X-45- L-2/X-46- L-2/X-47- L-2/X-48-
L-2/X-49- L-2/X-50- L-2/X-51- L-2/X-52- L-2/X-53- L-2/X-54-
L-2/X-55- L-2/X-56- L-2/X-57- L-2X-58- L-2/X-59- L-2/X-60-
L-2/X-61- L-2/X-62- L-2/X-63- L-2/X-64- L-2/X-65- L-2/X-66-
L-2/X-67- L-2/X-68- L-2/X-69- L-2/X-70- L-2/X-71- L-2/X-72-
L-2/X-73- L-2/X-74- L-2/X-75- L-2/X-76- L-2/X-77- L-2/X-78-
L-2/X-79- L-2/X-80- L-2/X-81- L-2/X-82- L-2/X-83- L-2/X-84-
L-2/X-85- L-2/X-86- L-2/X-87- L-2/X-88- L-2/X-89- L-2/X-90-
L-2/X-91- L-2/X-92- L-2/X-93- L-2/X-94- L-2/X-95- L-2/X-96-
L-2/X-97- L-2/X-98- L-2/X-99- L-2/X-100- L-2/X-101- L-2/X-102-
L-2/X-103- L-2/X-104- L-2/X-105- L-2/X-106- L-2/X-107- L-2/X-108-
L-2/X-109- L-2/X-110- L-2/X- 111- L-2/X-112- L-2/X-113- L-2/X-114-
L-2/X-115- L-2/X-116- L-2/X-117- L-2/X-118- L-2/X-119- L-2/X-120-
L-2/X-121- L-2/X-122- L-2/X-123- L-2/X-124- L-2/X-125- L-2/X-126-
L-2/X-127- L-2/X-128- L-2/X-129- L-2/X-130- L-2/X-131- L-2/X-132-
L-2/X-133- L-2/X-134- L-2/X-135- L-2/X-136- L-2/X-137- L-2/X-138-
L-2/X-139- L-2/X-140- L-2/X-141- L-2/X-142- L-2/X-143- L-2/X-144-
L-2/X-145- L-2/X-146- L-2/X-147- L-2/X-148- L-2/X-149- L-2'X-150-
L-2/X-151- L-2/X-152- L-2/X-153- L-2/X-154- L-2/X-155- L-2/X-156-
L-2/X-157- L-2/X-158- L-2/X-159- L-2/X-160- L-2/X-161- L-2X-162-
L-2X-163- L-2/X-164- L-2/X-165- L-2/X-166- L-2/X-167- L-2/X-168-
L-2/X-169- L-2/X-170- L-2/X-171- L-2/X-172-
L-2/X-173- L-2/X-174- L-2/X-175- L-2/X-176- L-2/X-177- L-2/X-178-
L-2/X-179- L-2/X-180- L-2/X-181- L-2/X-182- L-2/X-183- L-2/X-184-
L-2/X-185- L-2/X-186- L-2/X-187- L-2/X-188- L-2/X-189- L-2/X-190- L-2/X-191 - L-2/X-192- L-2/X-193- L-2/X-194- L-2 'X- 195- L-2/X- 196-
L-2/X-197- L-2/X-198- L-2/X-199- L-2/X-200- L-2/X-201 - L-2/X-202-
L-2/X-203- L-2/X-204- L-2/X-205- L-2/X-206- L-2/X-207- L-2/X-208-
L-2/X-209- L-2/X-210- L-2/X-21 1 - L-2/X-212- L-2/X-213- L-2/X-214-
L-2/X-215- L-2/X-216- L-2/X-217- L-2/X-218- L-2/X-219- L-2/X-220-
L-2/X-221- L-2/X-222- L-2/X-223- L-2/X-224- L-2/X-225- L-2/X-226-
L-2/X-227- L-2/X-228- L-2/X-229- L-2/X-230- L-2/X-231 - L-2/X-232-
L-2/X-233- L-2/X-234- L-2/X-235- L-2/X-236- L-2/X-237- L-2/X-238-
L-2/X-239- L-2/X-240- L-2/X-241 - L-2/X-242- L-2/X-243- L-2/X-244-
L-2/X-245- L-2/X-246- L-2/X-247- L-2/X-248- L-2/X-249- L-2/X-250-
L-2/X-251 - L-2/X-252- L-2/X-253- L-2/X-254- L-2/X-255- L-2/X-256-
L-2/X-257- L-2/X-258- L-2/X-259- L-2/X-260- L-2/X-261 - L-2/X-262-
L-2/X-263- L-2/X-264- L-2/X-265- L-2/X-266- L-2/X-267- L-2/X-268-
L-2/X-269- L-2/X-270- L-2/X-271 - L-2/X-272- L-2/X-273- L-2/X-274-
L-2/X-275- L-2/X-276- L-2/X-277- L-2/X-278- L-2/X-279- L-2/X-280-
L-2/X-281 - L-2/X-282- L-2/X-283- L-2/X-284- L-2/X-285- L-2/X-286-
L-2/X-287- L-2/X-288- L-2/X-289- L-2/X-290- L-2/X-291- L-2/X-292-
L-2/X-293- L-2/X-294- L-2/X-295- L-2/X-296- L-2/X-297- L-2/X-298-
L-2/X-299- L-2/X-300- L-2/X-301 - L-2/X-302- L-2/X-303- L-2/X-304-
L-2/X-305- L-2/X-306- L-2/X-307- L-2/X-308- L-2/X-309- L-2/X-310-
L-2/X-3 U- L-2/X-312- L-2/X-313- L-2/X-314- L-2/X-315- L-2/X-316-
L-2/X-317- L-2/X-318- L-2/X-319- L-2/X-320- L-2/X-321- L-2/X-322-
L-2/X-323- L-2/X-324- L-2/X-325- L-2/X-326- L-2/X-327- L-2/X-328-
L-2/X-329- L-2/X-330- L-2/X-331- L-2/X-332- L-2/X-333- L-2/X-334-
L-2/X-335- L-2/X-336- L-2/X-337- L-2/X-338- L-2/X-339- L-2/X-340-
L-2/X-341- L-2/X-342- L-2/X-343- L-2/X-344- L-2/X-345- L-2/X-346-
L-2/X-347- L-2/X-348- L-2/X-349- L-2/X-350- L-2/X-351- L-2/X-352-
L-2/X-353- L-2/X-354- L-2/X-355- L-2/X-356- L-2/X-357- L-2/X-358-
L-2/X-359- L-2/X-360- L-2/X-361- L-2/X-362- L-2/X-363- L-2/X-364-
L-2/X-365- L-2/X-366- L-2/X-367- L-2/X-368- L-2/X-369- L-2/X-370-
L-2/X-371 - L-2/X-372- L-2/X-373- L-2/X-374- L-2/X-375- L-2/X-376-
L-2/X-377- L-2/X-378- L-2/X-379- L-2/X-380- L-2/X-381 - L-2/X-382-
L-2/X-383- L-2/X-384- L-2/X-385- L-2/X-386- L-2/X-387- L-2/X-388-
L-2/X-389- L-2/X-390- L-2/X-391 - L-2/X-392- L-2/X-393- L-2/X-394-
L-2/X-395- L-2/X-396- L-2/X-397- L-2/X-398- L-2/X-399- L-2/X-400-
L-2/X-401- L-2/X-402- L-2/X-403- L-2/X-404- L-2/X-405- L-2/X-406-
L-2/X-407- L-2/X-408- L-2/X-409- L-2/X-410- L-2/X-41 1 - L-2/X-412- L-2/X-413- L-2/X-414- L-2/X- and so on, substituting L-1 with L-2.
Utility, Testing, and Administration Utility
The multibinding compounds of this invention are β3 adrenergic receptor agonists. Accordingly, the multibinding compounds and pharmaceutical compositions of this invention are useful in the treatment and prevention of diseases mediated by β3 adrenergic receptor such as asthma, bronchitis, and the like. They are also useful in the treatment of nervous system injury and premature labor. It is also contemplated that the multibinding compounds of this invention are useful for the treatment of metabolic disorders such as obesity, diabetes, and the like. Additionally, it is contemplated that the compounds of this invention are useful in the treatment of hypertension, cardiovascular diseases, ischemic heart diseases, myocardial ischemia, arrhythmias, angina, myocardial infarction, migraine prophylaxis, and anxiety.
Testing Compounds of the invention are tested in vitro in assays known by persons skilled in the art. For example, the affinity and selectivity are studied in cells expressing β-AR by functional and radio ligand binding studies described in Dolan, J. A., et al. 1994."β3-adrenoreceptor selectivity of the dioxolane dicarboxylate phenefhanolamines". J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 269(3): 1000.
The potency and duration of the effect are also studied in vitro using CHO cells transfected with human β3-AR as described in Candelore, M., et al. 1996. "Pharmacological characterization of a recently described human β3-adrenergic receptor mutant". Endocrin. 137(6):2638).
Compounds of the invention can be tested in vivo in assays known by persons skilled in the art. For example, the specificity of the compound for β3-AR is assessed in mice with monosodium-L-glutamate-induced obesity by the procedure described in Yoshida, T., et al.. 1994. Eur. J. Endocrin., 131 :97. The pharmacokinetics, efficacy, and duration of lipolysis are assessed in ob/ob mice. fa/fa rats or other obese rodents (Zucker.). The efficacy and duration of lipolysis are determined in human β3 transgenic mice as described in Moriko, I., et al. 1998. "Mice expressing human but not murine β3-adrenergic receptors under the control of human gene regulatory elements". Diabetes 47: 1464. The reversal of diet- induced obesity in rats by compounds is studied using the method described in Ghorbani, M., et al. 1997. "Hypertropy of brown adipocytes in brown and white adipose tissues and reversal of diet-induced obesity in rats treated with β3- adrenoceptor agonists". Biochem. Phamacol. 54: 121.
Pharmaceutical Formulations
When employed as pharmaceuticals, the compounds of this invention are usually administered in the form of pharmaceutical compositions. These compounds can be administered by a variety of routes including oral, rectal, transdermal, subcutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, and intranasal. These compounds are effective as injectable, intranasal, and oral compositions. Such compositions are prepared in a manner well known in the pharmaceutical art and comprise at least one active compound.
This invention also includes pharmaceutical compositions which contain, as the active ingredient, one or more of the compounds described herein associated with pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. In making the compositions of this invention, the active ingredient is usually mixed with an excipient, diluted by an excipient or enclosed within such a carrier which can be in the form of a capsule, sachet, paper or other container. When the excipient serves as a diluent, it can be a solid, semi-solid, or liquid material, which acts as a vehicle, carrier or medium for the active ingredient. Thus, the compositions can be in the form of tablets, pills, powders, lozenges, sachets, cachets, elixirs, suspensions, emulsions, solutions, syrups, aerosols (as a solid or in a liquid medium), ointments containing, for example, up to 10% by weight of the active compound, soft and hard gelatin capsules, suppositories, sterile injectable solutions, and sterile packaged powders. In preparing a formulation, it may be necessary to mill the active compound to provide the appropriate particle size prior to combining with the other ingredients. If the active compound is substantially insoluble, it ordinarily is milled to a particle size of less than 200 mesh. If the active compound is substantially water soluble, the particle size is normally adjusted by milling to provide a substantially uniform distribution in the formulation, e.g. about 40 mesh.
Some examples of suitable excipients include lactose, dextrose, sucrose, sorbitol, mannitol. starches, gum acacia, calcium phosphate, alginates, tragacanth, gelatin, calcium silicate, microcrystalline cellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone, cellulose, sterile water, syrup, and methyl cellulose. The formulations can additionally include: lubricating agents such as talc, magnesium stearate, and mineral oil; wetting agents; emulsifying and suspending agents; preserving agents such as methyl- and propylhydroxy-benzoates; sweetening agents; and flavoring agents. The compositions of the invention can be formulated so as to provide quick, sustained or delayed release of the active ingredient after administration to the patient by employing procedures known in the art.
The compositions are preferably formulated in a unit dosage form, each dosage containing from about 0.001 to about 1 g. more usually about 1 to about 30 mg, of the active ingredient. The term "unit dosage forms" refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages for human subjects and other mammals. each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active material calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with a suitable pharmaceutical excipient. Preferably, the compound of Formula (I) above is employed at no more than about 20 weight percent of the pharmaceutical composition, more preferably no more than about 15 weight percent, with the balance being pharmaceutically inert carrier(s).
The active compound is effective over a wide dosage range and is generally administered in a pharmaceutically effective amount. It, will be understood, however, that the amount of the compound actually administered will be determined by a physician, in the light of the relevant circumstances, including the condition to be treated, the chosen route of administration, the actual compound administered and its relative activity, the age, weight, and response of the individual patient, the severity of the patient's symptoms, and the like.
For preparing solid compositions such as tablets, the principal active ingredient is mixed with a pharmaceutical excipient to form a solid preformulation composition containing a homogeneous mixture of a compound of the present invention. When referring to these preformulation compositions as homogeneous, it is meant that the active ingredient is dispersed evenly throughout the composition so that the composition may be readily subdivided into equally effective unit dosage forms such as tablets, pills and capsules. This solid preformulation is then subdivided into unit dosage forms of the type described above containing from, for example, 0.1 to about 500 mg of the active ingredient of the present invention. The tablets or pills of the present invention may be coated or otherwise compounded to provide a dosage form affording the advantage of prolonged action. For example, the tablet or pill can comprise an inner dosage and an outer dosage component, the latter being in the form of an envelope over the former. The two components can be separated by an enteric layer which serves to resist disintegration in the stomach and permit the inner component to pass intact into the duodenum or to be delayed in release. A variety of materials can be used for such enteric layers or coatings, such materials including a number of polymeric acids and mixtures of polymeric acids with such materials as shellac, cetyl alcohol, and cellulose acetate.
The liquid forms in which the novel compositions of the present invention may be incorporated for administration orally or by injection include aqueous solutions, suitably flavored syrups, aqueous or oil suspensions, and flavored emulsions with edible oils such as corn oil, cottonseed oil, sesame oil. coconut oil, or peanut oil, as well as elixirs and similar pharmaceutical vehicles.
Compositions for inhalation or insufflation include solutions and suspensions in pharmaceutically acceptable, aqueous or organic solvents, or mixtures thereof, and powders. The liquid or solid compositions may contain suitable pharmaceutically acceptable excipients as described supra. Preferably the compositions are administered by the oral or nasal respiratory route for local or systemic effect. Compositions in preferably pharmaceutically acceptable solvents may be nebulized by use of inert gases. Nebulized solutions may be inhaled directly from the nebulizing device or the nebulizing device may be attached to a face mask tent, or intermittent positive pressure breathing machine. Solution, suspension, or powder compositions may be administered, preferably orally or nasally, from devices which deliver the formulation in an appropriate manner.
EXAMPLES
The following preparations and examples are given to enable those skilled in the art to more clearly understand and to practice the present invention. They should not be considered as limiting the scope of the invention, but merely as being illustrative and representative thereof.
In the examples below, the following abbreviations have the following meanings. Unless otherwise stated, all temperatures are in degrees Celsius. If an abbreviation is not defined, it has its generally accepted meaning.
A Angstroms cm centimeter DMF NN-dimethylformamide EtOH ethanol g gram HPLC high performance liquid chromatography
Et3N triethylamine mg milligram min minute mL milliliter mm millimeter mmol millimol
N normal
THF tetrahydrofuran μL microliters -87-
NaOH sodium hydroxide EtOAc ethyl acetate LiAlH4 lithium aluminum hydride PyBOP benzotriazol- 1 -yloxy)tripyrrolidino- phosphonium hexafluorophosphate
Synthetic Examples Example 1
Synthesis of a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (1) wherein the ligands are a compound of formula (a) wherein Ar1 is 1 -naphthyl. R'. R2. and R3 are hydrogen and the linker is 1.4-cyclohexane
(following Figure 5)
Figure imgf000108_0001
Step 1
A suspension of 1-naphthol 1 (Ar1 = naphthalene) (20 mmole) in water (30 mL) is degassed and saturated with nitrogen gas. To this stirred solution is added sodium hydroxide (22 mmole). After stirring for 30 min., the reaction mixture is treated with epichlorohydrin 2 (38 mmole). The reaction mixture is stirred at rt for 16 h, during which precipitates are formed. The precipitate is collected on a Buchner funnel, and the solid is rinsed with water. The product, 1-(1- naphthyloxy)-2,3-epoxypropane 3 (Ar1 = naphthalene) is recrystalhzed from EtOH. Step 2
To a solution of EtOH (50 mL) containing l-(l-naphthyloxy)-2,3- epoxypropane 3 (10 mmole) is added 1,4-diaminocyclohexane 4 (X = C6H10; R' = H) (5 mmole). The reaction mixture is refluxed for 10 h, and concentrated to afford an oily residue. The crude product is purified by reversed phase HPLC using a linear gradient of 5 to 30% MeCN/H20 over 30 min; flow rate = 20 mL/min; and detection at 254 nm to give a compound of Formula (I) (wherein Ar1 = naphthalene, R', R2, and R3 are hydrogen, and X is 1 ,4-cyclohexane).
Example 2 Synthesis of a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (I) wherein the ligands are a compound of formula (a) wherein Ar1 is 3-chlorophenyl. R1. R2. and R3 are hydrogen and the linker is p-xy\y\ (following Figure 6)
Figure imgf000109_0001
Step l
To a solution of EtOH (50 mL) containing l -(m-chlorophenyloxy)-2,3- epoxypropane 3 (Ar1=: m-chlorophenyl) (10 mmole) is added cone. NH3 (50 mmole). The reaction mixture is refluxed for 10 h. and concentrated to afford a oily residue. The crude product 5 (Ar1 = w-chlorophenyl) is purified by silica column chromatography using 2% MeOH/CH2Cl2. Step 2 l-(w-chlorophenyloxy)-3-amino-2-propanol (1.0 mmole) and benzene- 1,4- diacetic acid (0.5 mmole) are dissolved in N, N'-dimethylformamide (DMF) (5 mL) followed by addition of l-hydroxy-7-azabenzotriazole (HOAT) (1.0 mmole) and Et3Ν (2.0 mmole). To this stirred solution is added PyBOP (1.1 mmole) as solid. After stirring at ambient temperature for 24 h, the reaction mixture is diluted with brine (20 mL). and extracted with EtOAc (50 mL). The organic phase is washed with 0.1 M HCl, 0.1 M NaOH, and brine, followed by drying over MgS04. Evaporation of the organic solution under reduced pressure affords a pale yellow oily residue. The crude bis-amide product 6 ((Ar1 = m-chlorophenyl; X = phenylene) is purified by flash silica column chromatography (using a linear gradient of 1/1 EtOAc/hexanes to 0.1/1/1 MeOH/EtOAc/hexanes). Step 3
Compound 6 (0.4 mmole) is added slowly to a stirred suspension of LiAlR, (3.2 mmole) in THF (40 mL) cooled in an ice bath. The reaction mixture is slowly warmed to rt (30 min), and refluxed at 80 °C for 4 h. After cooling of the mixture with ice bath, 1.0 M NaOH (0.5 mL) is added to quench the reaction, followed by stirring 30 min. The reaction mixture is filtered, and the solid residue is rinsed with 99%o THF/H2O (50 mL). Filtrates are combined, and evaporated in vacuo, yielding a pale yellow oily residue which is purified by flash silica column chromatography using a linear gradient of 2% MeOH/CH2Cl2 to 2% ;-PrNH2/10% MeOH/CH2Cl2 as the eluent to give a compound of Formula (I) (wherein Ar1 = w-chlorophenyl; X = p-xylyl).
Example 3
Synthesis of a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (I) wherein the ligands are a compound of formula (a) wherein Ar' is 5-carbazolyl. R1. R2. and R3 are hydrogen and the linker is dodecyl
(following Figure 7)
Figure imgf000110_0001
Step l
A solution of EtOH (50 mL) containing l-(5-carbazolyloxy)-2,3- epoxypropane (Ar1 = 5-carbazolyl) (2 mmole) and benzylamine is refluxed for 18 h, and concentrated in vacuo to dryness, yielding a pale yellow oil. The product l-(5- carbazolyloxy)-3-benzylamino-2-propanol 7 is purified by flash silica column chromatography (2% MeOH/CH2Cl2). Step 2
A solution of DMF (1 mL) containing l-(5-carbazolyloxy)-3-benzylamino- 2-propanol 7 (0.2 mmole), and 1,12-diiodododecane 8 (X is (CH2)12) (0.1 mmole) in a sealed vial is heated at 85 °C for 24 h while shaking. The reaction mixture is mixed into ether (45 mL) in a plastic bottle, and the mixture is shaken to homogeneity, precipitating a pale brown oily residue. Precipitate in the bottle is collected by spinning it down at 3500 rpm for 20 min, rinsed with ether (50 mL), and dried in air. It is purified by flash silica column chromatography (2% MeOH/CH2Cl2) to give a compound of formula 9 (wherein Ar'= 5-carbazolyl; X = (CH2)12). Step 3
Compound 9 (0.2 mmole) is dissolved in EtOH (50 mL) containing 10% Pd/C (100 mg). The reaction mixture is degassed, and saturated with H2 gas. After stirring the mixture under H2 atmosphere (1 atm) for 12 h at ambient temperature. the catalyst is filtered, and washed with EtOH (50 mL). Filtrates are combined, and evaporated, yielding a colorless oily residue. The crude product is dissolved in 30% MeCN/water (containing 0.5% TFA), and purified by reversed-phase HPLC to give a compound of Formula (I) (wherein Ar'= 5-carbazolyl; X = (CH2),2).
Example 4
Synthesis of a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (I wherein the ligands are a compound of formula (a wherein Ar1 is o-allylphenyl. R1. R2, and R3 are hydrogen and the linker is m-xγ\y\
(following Figure 8)
Figure imgf000111_0001
To a solution of isophthalaldehyde 10 (Z = m-phenylene) (3 mmole) cooled in ice bath is added 3-amino-l-(o-allylphenyloxy)-2-propanol 5 (Ar' = o- allylphenyl) (6 mmole). The reaction mixture is stirred and gradually warmed to rt. After stirring for 2 h at rt, NaBH4 (12 mmole) is added to the mixture. The final mixture is stirred for 2 h at rt, and treated with water (1 mL) to quench the reaction. The reaction mixture is concentrated under reduced pressure, and the residue is purified by reversed phase HPLC using a linear gradient of 5 to 30% MeCN/H20 over 30 min; flow rate = 20 mL/min; detection at 254 nm to give a compound of Formula (I) (wherein Ar1 =o-allylphenyl; X is w-xylyl).
Example 5 Synthesis of bis-phenols wherein the linker. X. is -O-fCH2)l?-O-: -NHCO-fCHΛ- CONH- or -CONH-. CH -O-. CH -O-fCH -NHCO- (following Figure 9)
Method ( ) R = hydrogen and X = -O-CCH.yO-:
A solution of DMF (50 mL) containing /?-hydroquinone (10 mmole) in ice bath is saturated with nitrogen gas for 5 min, and treated with NaOMe (10.5 mmole). The mixture is stirred for 30 min in ice bath, and followed by addition of 1,10-diiododecane (Z = -(CH,),0-) (5 mmole). After stirring at 85 °C for 24 h, the mixture is cooled down, and diluted with EtOAc (100 mL). The organic solution is washed with brine. The organic phase is dried over Na2S04, and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford crude product which is purified by silica column chromatography by eluting with EtOAc/hexane (1/2) to give compound 11 (wherein R is hydrogen, X - -O-(CH2)l0-O).
Method b)
R = hydrogen and X = -NHCO-fCHΛ-CONH-:
4-Aminophenol (1.0 mmole) and 1 ,6-hexanedioic acid (Z = -(CH2)6-) (0.5 mmole) are dissolved in 5 mL of N N'-dimethylformamide (DMF) followed by addition of HO AT (1.0 mmole) and Et3Ν (2.0 mmole). To this stirred solution is added PyBOP (1.1 mmole) as solid. After stirring at ambient temperature for 24 h, the reaction mixture is diluted with brine (20 mL), and extracted with EtOAc (50 mL). The organic phase is washed with 0.1 M HCl, and brine, followed by drying over MgS04. Evaporation of the organic solution under reduced pressure affords a solid residue. The crude bis-amide product 12 (wherein R = H and X = -NHCO- (CH2)6-CONH-) is purified by flash silica column chromatography (1/1 EtOAc/hexanes to 2% MeOH in 1/1 EtOAc/hexanes).
Method (c)
R = hydrogen and X = -CONH-fCHΛOfCH^OfCH -NHCO-: 4-Carboxyphenol (R = H) ( 1.0 mmole) and 1 , 10-diaza-4.7-dioxadecane (Z =
-(CFI2)2O(CH2)20(CH2)2- ) (0.5 mmole) are dissolved in 5 mL of NN'- dimethylformamide (DMF) followed by addition of HOAT (1.0 mmole) and Et3Ν (2.0 mmole). To this stirred solution is added PyBOP (1.1 mmole) as solid. After stirring at ambient temperature for 24 h, the reaction mixture is diluted with brine (20 mL), and extracted with EtOAc (50 mL). The organic phase is washed with 0.1 M HCl, and brine, followed by drying over MgS0 . Evaporation of the organic solution under reduced pressure affords a solid residue. The crude bis-amide product 13 (wherein R = hydrogen and X = -CONH-(CH2)2O(CH2)2O(CH2)2- NHCO-) is purified by flash silica column chromatography (1/1 EtOAc/hexanes).
Example 6
Synthesis of a bivalent multilinding compound of Formula (I) wherein the ligands are a compound of formula (a wherein Ar1 is phenyl. R1, R2. are hydrogen. R3 is isopropyl. and the linker is -Q-fCH2 , 0-O- (following Figure 10)
Figure imgf000114_0001
Step 1
A suspension of compound 11 (X = -O(CH2),0O-) (20 mmole) in water (30 mL) is degassed, saturated with nitrogen gas. and treated with NaOH (44 mmole). After stiring for 30 min., the reaction mixture is treated with epichlorohydrin (80 mmole) under nitrogen atmosphere. The reaction mixture is stirred at rt. After stirring for 16 h under nitrogen atmosphere, the precipitate is collected on a Buchner funnel, and the solid is rinsed with water. The product 14 is recrystalhzed from EtOH. Step 2
To a solution of EtOH (50 mL) containing 14 (10 mmole) is added i- propylamine (21 mmole). The reaction mixture is refluxed for 10 h, and concentrated to afford an oily residue. The crude product is purified by reversed phase HPLC: i) using a linear gradient of 5 to 30%> MeCN/H20 over 30 min; ii) flow rate = 20 mL/min; iii) detection at 254 nm to give a compound of Formula (I) (where R = -C3H7; X = -O(CH2)10O-).
The above strategy is applied to combinatorial reaction arrays between bis- epoxides (14) and amines, from which libraries of compounds of Formula (I) are generated. Example 7
Synthesis of a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (I) wherein the ligands are a compound of formula (a) wherein Ar1 is phenyl. R'. R2, are hydrogen. R3 is 2- phenylethyl. and the linker is / CONH(CHΛNHCO-p (following Figure 1 1 )
Figure imgf000115_0001
Step l
To a solution of EtOH (50 mL) containing oxirane 15 (X =p- CONH(CH2)6NHCO-/?) (10 mmole) is added cone. NH3 (80 mmole). The reaction mixture is refluxed for 10 h, and concentrated to afford an oily residue. The crude product is purified by reversed phase HPLC i) using a linear gradient of 5 to 30% MeCN/H20 over 30 min; ii) flow rate = 20 mL/min; iii) detection at 254 nm to give
Figure imgf000115_0002
Step 2
A solution of EtOH (10 mL) containing 16 (1 mmole; TFA salt) is treated with 5M NaOH (0.42 mL), and evaporated under reduced pressure to afford 7a as neutral amine. It is dissolved in EtOH (10 mL). cooled in ice bath, and followed by addition of phenylacetaldehyde (2 mmole) in EtOH (1 mL). After being allowed to form an imine by stirring for 2 h, the reaction mixture is treated with NaCNBH3 (3 mmole) and stirred for 2 h. The reaction is quenched by addition of water (1 mL), and the mixture is concentrated under reduced pressure to dryness. The crude product solubilized in 30% aq. MeCN and purified by reversed phase HPLC: i) using a linear gradient of 5 to 30% MeCN/FLO over 30 min; ii) flow rate - 20 mL/min; iii) detection at 254 nm to give a compound of Formula (I) (wherein X = p-CONH(CH2)4NHCO-/. ; R = CH2CH2C6H5). Example 8
Synthesis of a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (I) wherein the ligands are a compound of formula (b wherein Ar2 is phenyl. R . R5. and R3 are hydrogen W is -CH(CH, .CH,-. Ar3 is thiazole and the linker is - (CH2)3CONH(CH ,NHCO-(CH .-
(following Figure 12)
Figure imgf000116_0001
Step 1
To a solution of MeOH (20 mL) containing compound 17a (prepared by the procedure described in L. G. Fisher, et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 1996, 6. 2253- 2258) (10 mmole) is added Et3N (1 1 mmole) and (Boc)20 (1 1 mmole) in MeOH (5 mL). After stirring for 24 h at rt, the reaction mixture is concentrated under reduced pressure to dryness to afford a solid residue which is purified by silica column chromatography by eluting with 1/1 EtOAc/hexane to give compound 17b. Step 2
Compound 17b (1.0 mmole) and 1 ,4-diaminobutane (0.5 mmole) are dissolved in 5 mL of N N'-dimethylformamide (DMF) followed by addition of HO AT (1.0 mmole) and Et3Ν (2.0 mmole). To this stirred solution is added PyBOP (1.1 mmole) as solid. After stirring at ambient temperature for 24 h. the reaction mixture is diluted with brine (20 mL), and extracted with EtOAc (50 mL). The organic phase is washed with 0.1 M HCl, 0.1 M NaOH, and brine, followed by drying over MgS04. Evaporation of the organic solution under reduced pressure affords a crude bis-amide product. It is solubilized in CH2C12 (10 mL), cooled in ice bath, and treated with CF3C02H (TFA) (5 mL) under nitrogen atomsphere. The reaction mixture is stirred for 1 h in ice bath, and concentrated under reduced pressure to yield crude product which is purified by reversed phase HPLC: i) using a linear gradient of 10% to 40% MeCN/H20 over 50 min; ii) flow rate 20 mL/min to give compound of Formula (I) (R = H, Z = - (CH2)4-).
Using the same method as above, compounds 18a and 19a (R.. Howe, et al, J. Med. Chem. 1992, 35, 1751) are converted to 18b and 19b, respectively. Each of the N-Boc protected compounds — 18b and 19b — is then converted to a compound of Formula (I) as described here.
Example 9
Synthesis of a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula fl) wherein the ligands are a compound of formula (b) wherein Ar2 is pyridyl. R4. R5. and R3 are hydrogen W is -fCH2 2-. Ar3 is 4-(phenylsulfonamido)phenyl and the linker is
-ΝH(CH2)8ΝH- (following Figure 13)
Figure imgf000117_0001
Step 1
To a solution of MeOH (20 mL) containing 20a (10 mmole) (see. A. E. Weber, et al, Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 1998. S, 1 101 and 21 11 ; E. R. Parmee, et al, Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 1998, S, 1 107) is added (Boc),O (1 1 mmole) in MeOH (5 mL). After stirring for 24 h at rt, the reaction mixture is concentrated under reduced pressure to dryness to afford 20b as a solid residue. It is purified by silica column chromatography by eluting with 1/1 EtOAc/hexanes. Step 2 To a nitrogen-saturated solution of 20b (2 mmole) and 1.8-diaminooctane
(Z = -(CH2)r) (1 mmole) in 10 mL of toluene is added Pd2(DBA)3 (0.2 mmole), P(o-Tol)3 (0.8 mmole), and t-BuONa (20 mmole). The mixture is heated at 100 °C for 24 h under nitrogen atmosphere. After cooled down, the reaction mixture is passed through a filter paper and the solid residue is rinsed with EtOAc (20 mL). The filtrate is diluted with EtOAc (50 mL), and washed with brine (3 x 20 mL). Evaporation of the organic solution under reduced pressure affords a crude coupled product. It is solubilized in CH2C12 (10 mL), cooled in ice bath, and treated with CF3C02H (TFA) (5 mL) under nitrogen atmosphere. The reaction mixture is stirred for 1 h in ice bath, and concentrated under reduced pressure to yield crude product which is purified by reversed phase HPLC: i) using a linear gradient of 10% to 40% MeCN/H20 over 50 min; ii) flow rate 20 mL/min to give a compound of Formula (I) (Z = -(CH2)8-) .
Example 10
Synthesis of a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (I) wherein the ligands are a compound of formula (b wherein Ar2 is phenyl. R4. R5. and R3 are hydrogen W is -(CH2 2-. Ar3 is 4-fquinolin-3-ylsulfonamido)phenyl and the linker is -O- ( CH OfCH OfCH-yO-
(following Figure 14)
Figure imgf000119_0001
Step l
To a solution of MeOH (20 mL) containing 21a (10 mmole) (see, A. E. Weber, et al, Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 1998. 8, 1101 ; E. R. Parmee. et al, Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 1998, 8, 1107) is added (Boc)20 (11 mmole) in MeOH (5 mL). After stirring for 24 h at rt, the reaction mixture is concentrated under reduced pressure to dryness to afford 21b as a solid residue. It is purified by silica column chromatography by eluting with 1/1 EtOAc/hexanes. Step 2 A solution of DMF (50 mL) containing 21b (10 mmole) in ice bath is saturated with nitrogen gas for 5 min, and treated with NaOMe (10.5 mmole). The mixture is stirred for 30 min in ice bath, and followed by addition of bis-(2- iodoethoxy)ethane (5 mmole). After stirring at 85 °C for 24 h, the mixture is cooled down, and diluted with EtOAc (100 mL). The organic solution is washed with brine, dried over Na2S04. and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford crude product. It is dissolved in CH2C12 (10 mL), cooled in ice bath, and treated with CF3CO2H (TFA) (5 mL) under nitrogen atmosphere. The reaction mixture is stirred for 1 h in ice bath, and concentrated under reduced pressure to yield crude product which is purified by reversed phase HPLC: i) using a linear gradient of 10% to 40% MeCN/H20 over 50 min; ii) flow rate 20 mL/min to give a compound of Formula (I) (Z = -0-(CH2)20(CH2)20(CH2)2-0-).
Example 11
Synthesis of a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (\) wherein the ligands are a compound of formula (b) wherein Ar2 is phenol. R4. R\ and R3 are hydrogen W is -fCH2y. Ar3 is phenyl and the linker is w-NHS0 C„H,SQ NH-
(following Figure 15)
Figure imgf000120_0001
Step l
To a cold solution of MeOH (20 mL) containing 22a (10 mmole) (see, A. E. Weber, et al, Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 1998, S, 1 101) in ice bath is added (Boc)20 (10 mmole) in MeOH (5 mL). The reaction mixture is stirred and allowed to warm up gradually to ambient temperature. After stirring for 24 h at rt, the reaction mixture is concentrated under reduced pressure to dryness to afford 22b as a solid residue. It is purified by silica column chromatography by eluting with 1/1 EtOAc/hexanes. Step 2 Compound 22b (1.0 mmole) and Et3N (2.0 mmole) are dissolved in 5 mL of N, N'-dimethylformamide (DMF) followed by addition of benzene- 1,3- disulfonylchloride (0.5 mmole). After stirring at ambient temperature for 24 h, the reaction mixture is diluted with brine (20 mL), and extracted with EtOAc (50 mL). The organic phase is washed with sat. ΝaHC03 and brine, and dried over MgSO4. Evaporation of the organic solution under reduced pressure affords a crude bis-sulfonamide product which is solubilized in MeOH (10 mL), cooled in ice bath, and treated with 6M HCl (5 mL). The reaction mixture is stirred for 3 h in ice bath, and concentrated under reduced pressure to yield crude product which is purified by reversed phase HPLC: using a linear gradient of 10% to 40%
MeCN/H20 over 50 min; ii) flow rate 20 mL/min to give a compound of Formula (I) (Z is w-phenylene).
Example 12 Synthesis of a bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (I) wherein the ligands are a compound of formula (b) wherein Ar2 is phenol. R4. R\ and R3 are hydrogen W is -(CH2 2-. Ar3 is phenyl and the linker is
-NHCONHfCH2 ,NHCONH-
(following Figure 16)
Figure imgf000121_0001
Compound 22b (1.0 mmole) and Et3N (2.0 mmole) are dissolved in 5 mL of N N'-dimethylformamide (DMF) followed by addition of 1 ,4-diisocyanato- butane (0.5 mmole). After stirring at ambient temperature for 24 h, the reaction mixture is diluted with brine (20 mL), and extracted with EtOAc (50 mL). The organic phase is washed with sat. NaHC03 and brine, and dried over MgS04. Evaporation of the organic solution under reduced pressure affords a crude bis- sulfamide product which is solubilized in MeOH (10 mL), cooled in ice bath, and treated with 6M HCl (5 mL). The reaction mixture is stirred for 3 h in ice bath, and concentrated under reduced pressure to yield crude product which is purified by reversed phase HPLC: i) using a linear gradient of 10% to 40% MeCN/H20 over 50 min; ii) flow rate 20 mL/min to give a compound of Formula (I) (Z = (CH2)4) .
Formulation Examples Example 1
Hard gelatin capsules containing the following ingredients are prepared: Quantity
Ingredient (mg/capsule
Active Ingredient 30.0
Starch 305.0
Magnesium stearate 5.0
The above ingredients are mixed and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 340 mg quantities.
Example 2 A tablet Formula is prepared using the ingredients below:
Quantity Ingredient (mg/tablet)
Active Ingredient 25.0
Cellulose, microcrystalline 200.0 Colloidal silicon dioxide 10.0
Stearic acid 5.0 The components are blended and compressed to form tablets, each weighing 240 mg.
Example 3
A dry powder inhaler formulation is prepared containing the following components:
Ingredient Weight %
Active Ingredient 5
Lactose 95
The active ingredient is mixed with the lactose and the mixture is added to a dry powder inhaling appliance.
Example 4
Tablets, each containing 30 mg of active ingredient, are prepared as follows:
Quantity
Ingredient fme/tabletϊ
Active Ingredient 30.0 mg
Starch 45.0 mg
Microcrystalline cellulose 35.0 mg
Polyvinylpyrrolidone
(as 10%) solution in sterile water) 4.0 mg
Sodium carboxymethyl starch 4.5 mg
Magnesium stearate 0.5 mg
Talc 1.0 me
Total 120 mg
The active ingredient, starch and cellulose are passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve and mixed thoroughly. The solution of polyvinylpyrrolidone is mixed with the resultant powders, which are then passed through a 16 mesh U.S. sieve. The granules so produced are dried at 50° to 60°C and passed through a 16 mesh U.S. sieve. The sodium carboxymethyl starch, magnesium stearate, and talc, previously passed through a No. 30 mesh U.S. sieve, are then added to the granules which, after mixing, are compressed on a tablet machine to yield tablets each weighing 120 mg.
Example 5 Capsules, each containing 40 mg of medicament are made as follows: Quantity
Ingredient (mg/capsule)
Active Ingredient 40.0 mg
Starch 109.0 mg
Magnesium stearate 1.0 mg Total I SO.O mg
The active ingredient, starch, and magnesium stearate are blended, passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve, and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 150 mg quantities.
Example 6 Suppositories, each containing 25 mg of active ingredient are made as follows:
Ingredient Amount Active Ingredient 25 mg
Saturated fatty acid glycerides to 2,000 mg
The active ingredient is passed through a No. 60 mesh U.S. sieve and suspended in the saturated fatty acid glycerides previously melted using the minimum heat necessary. The mixture is then poured into a suppository mold of nominal 2.0 g capacity and allowed to cool. Example 7
Suspensions, each containing 50 mg of medicamenl : per 5.0 mL dose are made as follows:
Ingredient Amount
Active Ingredient 50.0 mg
Xanthan gum 4.0 mg
Sodium carboxymethyl cellulose (1 1%)
Microcrystalline cellulose (89%) 50.0 mg
Sucrose L75 g
Sodium benzoate l O.O mg
Flavor and Color q.v.
Purified water to 5.0 mL
The active ingredient, sucrose and xanthan gum are blended, passed through a No. 10 mesh U.S. sieve, and then mixed with a previously made solution of the microcrystalline cellulose and sodium carboxymethyl cellulose in water. The sodium benzoate, flavor, and color are diluted with some of the water and added with stirring. Sufficient water is then added to produce the required volume.
Example 8 A formulation may be prepared as follows:
Quantity Ingredient (mg/capsule) Active Ingredient 15.0 mg
Starch 407.0 mg
Magnesium stearate 3.0 mg
Total 425.0 mg
The active ingredient, starch, and magnesium stearate are blended, passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve, and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 425.0 mg quantities. Example 9
A formulation may be prepared as follows:
Ingredient Ouantitv
Active Ingredient 5.0 mg
Corn Oil 1.0 mL
Example 10
A topical formulation may be prepared as follows:
Ingredient Ouantitv
Active Ingredient 1 -lO g
Emulsifying Wax 30 g
Liquid Paraffin 20 g
White Soft Paraffin to 100 g
The white soft paraffin is heated until molten. The liquid paraffin and emulsifying wax are incoφorated and stirred until dissolved. The active ingredient is added and stirring is continued until dispersed. The mixture is then cooled until solid.
Another preferred formulation employed in the methods of the present invention employs transdermal delivery devices ("patches"). Such transdermal patches may be used to provide continuous or discontinuous infusion of the compounds of the present invention in controlled amounts. The construction and use of transdermal patches for the delivery of pharmaceutical agents is well known in the art. See, e.g., U.S. Patent 5.023.252, issued June 1 1, 1991 , herein incorporated by reference in its entirety. Such patches may be constructed for continuous, pulsatile, or on demand delivery of pharmaceutical agents.
Other suitable formulations for use in the present invention can be found in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, edited by E. W. Martin (Mack Publishing Company, 18th ed., 1990). The foregoing invention has been described in some detail by way of illustration and example, for purposes of clarity and understanding. It will be obvious to one of skill in the art that changes and modifications may be practiced within the scope of the appended claims. Therefore, it is to be understood that the above description is intended to be illustrative and not restrictive. The scope of the invention should, therefore, be determined not with reference to the above description, but should instead be determined with reference to the following appended claims, along with the full scope of equivalents to which such claims are entitled. All patents, patent applications and publications cited in this application are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety for all purposes to the same extent as if each individual patent, patent application or publication were so individually denoted.

Claims

WHAT IS CLAIMED IS:
1. A multibinding compound of Formula (I):
(L)p(X)q (I) wherein: p is an integer of from 2 to 10; q is an integer of from 1 to 20, each ligand, L, is independently of each other: (i) a compound of formula (a):
Figure imgf000128_0001
wherein:
Ar1 is selected from the group consisting of aryl, heteroaryl. cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl. and heterocyclyl wherein each of said Ar1 substituent optionally links the ligand to a linker via a covalent bond; R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, and a covalent bond that links the ligand to a linker;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, and a covalent bond that links the ligand to a linker; or (ii) a compound of formula (b):
Figure imgf000128_0002
wherein:
Ar2 is selected from the group consisting of aryl. heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, and heterocyclyl wherein each of said Ar2 substituent optionally links the ligand to a linker via a covalent bond;
R4 and R5 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, and a covalent bond that links the ligand to a linker;
W is a covalent bond, alkyl, or substituted alkyl where one or more of the carbon atoms in said alkyl or substituted alkyl group is optionally replaced by one or more heteroatom selected from -0-, S(0)n- (where n is an integer from 0 to 2), or -NR4- (where R4 is hydrogen, or alkyl); and Ar3 is selected from the group consisting of aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, and heterocycle wherein each of said Ar3 substituent optionally links the ligand to a linker via a covalent bond; each linker, X, in the multibinding compound of Formula (I) independently has the formula:
-Xd-Z-(Ya-Z)m-Xa- wherein: m is an integer of from 0 to 20;
Xa at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -0-, -S-, -NR-, -C(O)-, -C(0)0-. -OC(O)-, -C(0)NR-, -NRC(O)-, C(S), -C(S)0-, -C(S)NR-, -NRC(S)-, or a covalent bond where R is as defined below;
Z at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of alkylene, substituted alkylene, cycloalkylene. substituted cylcoalkylene, alkenylene, substituted alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylene, cycloalkenylene, substituted cycloalkenylene, arylene, heteroarylene, heterocyclene, or a covalent bond; each Ya at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -0-, -C(O)-, -OC(O)-, -C(0)0-. -NR-, -S(0)n-, -C(0)NR'-, -NR'C(O)-, -NR'C(O)NR'-, -NR'C(S)NR'-, -C(=NR')-NR\ -NR'-C(=NR')-, -OC(0)-NR\ -NR'-C(O)-0-, -NK X^-NR1-, -NR,-C(Xa)=N-,-P(0)(OR')-0-. -0-P(0)(OR , -S(0)nCR' R"-, -S(0)n-NR'-, -NR'-S(0)n -. and a covalent bond; where n is 0, 1 or 2; and R, R' and R" at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl. and heterocyclic; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, individual isomer, mixtures of isomers, and prodrugs thereof provided that the multibinding compound of Formula (I) cannot be:
(i) a compound of formula:
Figure imgf000130_0001
where the linker, X, is -0-(alkylene)-0-, -0-(hydroxyalkylene)-0-, -0-[(CH2)2.
[(OCH2CH2)n]-0- (where n is an integer of 1 to 3), or -NHCO-(alkylene)-CONH-
; and
(ii) a compound of formula RaRbNCH(CH3)CH2[-OCH2CH(CH3)-]2.8NRaRb wherein Ra is an aryl-OCH2CH(OH)CH2- group and Rb is either hydrogen or an aryl-OCH2CH(OH)CH2- group where the aryl group is 2-allylphenyl, 4-(2- mefhoxyethyl)phenyl. 1 -naphthyl, or 4-methoxyphenyl.
2. A bivalent multibinding compound of Formula (II):
ArΓÇö ┬░\^ / N X N.^A^/0ΓÇö Ar
(H)
wherein: each Ar1 is independently selected from the group consisting of: -110-
Figure imgf000131_0001
(R = H. CN)
Figure imgf000131_0002
and
X is selected from the group consisting of :
Figure imgf000132_0001
Figure imgf000132_0002
Figure imgf000132_0003
3. The multibinding compound of Claim 2 wherein the ligands are identical.
4. The multibinding compound of Claim 2 wherein the ligands are non- identical.
5. A multibinding compound of Formula (III):
Figure imgf000133_0001
wherein each ligand,
Figure imgf000133_0002
is independently selected from the group consisting of:
Figure imgf000134_0001
and
X is selected from the group consisting of -(CH2)n- (where n is an integer of from 2 to 8), -(CH2-CH2-0)n l-CH2-CH2- (where nl is 1 or 2). and ortho. meta, or para xylyl.
6. The multibinding compound of Claim 5 wherein the ligands are identical.
7. The multibinding compound of Claim 6 wherein the ligands are non- identical.
8. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and an effective amount of a multibinding compound of Formula (I):
( )p(X)q
(I) wherein: p is an integer of from 2 to 10; q is an integer of from 1 to 20, each ligand, L, is independently of each other:
(i) a compound of formula (a):
Figure imgf000135_0001
wherein:
Ar1 is selected from the group consisting of aryl, heteroaryl. cycloalkyl. substituted cycloalkyl. and heterocyclyl wherein each of said Ar1 substituent optionally links the ligand to a linker via a covalent bond;
R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, and a covalent bond that links the ligand to a linker; R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, and a covalent bond that links the ligand to a linker; or
(ii) a compound of formula (b):
Figure imgf000135_0002
(b) wherein:
Ar2 is selected from the group consisting of aryl, heteroaryl. cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, and heterocyclyl wherein each of said Ar substituent optionally links the ligand to a linker via a covalent bond; R4 and R5 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, and a covalent bond that links the ligand to a linker;
W is a covalent bond, alkyl, or substituted alkyl where one or more of the carbon atoms in said alkyl or substituted alkyl group is optionally replaced by one or more heteroatom selected from -0-, S(0)n- (where n is an integer from 0 to 2), or -NR4- (where R4 is hydrogen, or alkyl); and
Ar3 is selected from the group consisting of aryl. heteroaryl, cycloalkyl. substituted cycloalkyl, and heterocycle wherein each of said Ar3 substituent optionally links the ligand to a linker via a covalent bond; each linker, X, in the multibinding compound of Formula (I) independently has the formula:
-Xa-Z-(Ya-Z)m-Xa- wherein: m is an integer of from 0 to 20;
Xa at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -O-, -S-, -NR-, -C(O)-, -C(O)0-, -OC(O)-, -C(0)NR-, -NRC(O)-, C(S), -C(S)0-, -C(S)NR-, -NRC(S)-, or a covalent bond where R is as defined below;
Z at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of alkylene, substituted alkylene, cycloalkylene. substituted cylcoalkylene, alkenylene, substituted alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylene, cycloalkenylene, substituted cycloalkenylene, arylene, heteroarylene, heterocyclene, or a covalent bond; each Ya at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -O-, -C(O)-, -OC(O)-, -C(0)0-, -NR-. -S(0)n-. -C(0)NR"-, -NR'C(O)-,
-NR'C(O)NR'-, -NR'C(S)NR'-, -C(=NR')-NR\ -NR'-C(=NR>, -OC(0)-NR"-, -NR'-C(O)-0-, -N=C(Xa)-NR'-, -NR'-C(Xa)=N-,-P(0)(OR')-0-, -0-P(0)(OR')-. -S(O)nCR' R"-, -S(0)n-NR'-, -NR'-S(0)n -, and a covalent bond; where n is 0, 1 or 2; and R, R' and R" at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl. cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, individual isomer. mixtures of isomers, and prodrugs thereof provided that the multibinding compound of Formula (I) cannot be: (i) a compound of formula:
Figure imgf000137_0001
where the linker, X, is -0-(alkylene)-0-, -0-(hydroxyalkylene)-0-, -0-[(CH2)2. [(OCH2CH2)n]-0- (where n is an integer of 1 to 3), or -NHCO-(alkylene)-CONH- ; and
(ii) a compound of formula RaRbNCH(CH3)CH2[-OCH2CH(CH3)-]2.8NRaRb wherein Ra is an aryl-OCH2CH(OH)CH2- group and Rb is either hydrogen or an aryl-OCH2CH(OH)CH2- group where the aryl group is 2-allylphenyl, 4-(2- methoxyethyl)phenyl, 1 -naphthyl, or 4-methoxyphenyl.
9. The pharmaceutical composition Claim 8 wherein q is less than p.
10. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and an effective amount of a multibinding compound of Claim 2.
1 1. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and an effective amount of a multibinding compound of Claim 5.
12. A method for treating diseases mediated by a ╬▓3 adrenergic receptor in a mammal, said method comprising administering to said mammal a therapeutically effective amount of a pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a multibinding compound of Formula (I):
(L)p(X)q
(I) wherein: p is an integer of from 2 to 10; q is an integer of from 1 to 20, each ligand, L, is independently of each other:
(i) a compound of formula (a):
Figure imgf000138_0001
wherein:
Ar1 is selected from the group consisting of aryl, heteroaryl. cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl. and heterocyclyl wherein each of said Ar1 substituent optionally links the ligand to a linker via a covalent bond;
R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, and a covalent bond that links the ligand to a linker;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl. and a covalent bond that links the ligand to a linker; or (ii) a compound of formula (b):
Figure imgf000138_0002
wherein:
Ar2 is selected from the group consisting of aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl. substituted cycloalkyl, and heterocyclyl wherein each of said Ar2 substituent optionally links the ligand to a linker via a covalent bond;
R4 and R5 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, and a covalent bond that links the ligand to a linker;
W is a covalent bond, alkyl, or substituted alkyl where one or more of the carbon atoms in said alkyl or substituted alkyl group is optionally replaced by one or more heteroatom selected from -0-, S(0)n- (where n is an integer from 0 to 2), or -NR4- (where R4 is hydrogen, or alkyl); and Ar3 is selected from the group consisting of aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, and heterocycle wherein each of said Ar3 substituent optionally links the ligand to a linker via a covalent bond; each linker, X, in the multibinding compound of Formula (I) independently has the formula:
-Xa-Z-(Ya-Z)m-Xa- wherein: m is an integer of from 0 to 20;
Xa at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -O-, -S-, -NR-, -C(O)-, -C(O)0-, -OC(O)-, -C(0)NR-. -NRC(O)-, C(S), -C(S)0-, -C(S)NR-, -NRC(S)-, or a covalent bond where R is as defined below;
Z at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of alkylene, substituted alkylene, cycloalkylene, substituted cylcoalkylene, alkenylene, substituted alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylene, cycloalkenylene, substituted cycloalkenylene, arylene. heteroarylene, heterocyclene, or a covalent bond; each Ya at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -O-, -C(O)-, -OC(O)-, -C(0)0-, -NR-. -S(0)n-, -C(0)NR'-, -NR'C(O)-, -NR'C(O)NR'-, -NR'C(S)NR\ -C(=NR')-NR\ -NR'-C(=NR>, -OC(0)-NR'-, -NR'-C(O)-0-, -N=C(X3)-NR'-, -NR'-C(Xa)=N-,-P(0)(OR')-0-, -0-P(0)(OR')-, -S(O)nCR' R"-, -S(O)ΓÇ₧-NR'-, -NR'-S(0)n -. and a covalent bond; where n is 0, 1 or 2; and R, R' and R" at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, individual isomer, mixtures of isomers, and prodrugs thereof provided that the multibinding compound of Formula (I) cannot be:
(i) a compound of formula:
Figure imgf000140_0001
where the linker, X, is -0-(alkylene)-0-, -0-(hydroxyalkylene)-0-, -0-[(CH2)2.
[(OCH2CH2)n]-0- (where n is an integer of 1 to 3), or -NHCO-(alkylene)-CONH-
; and
(ii) a compound of formula RaRbNCH(CH3)CH2[-OCH2CH(CH3)-]2.8NRaRb wherein Ra is an aryl-OCH2CH(OH)CH2- group and Rb is either hydrogen or an aryl-OCH2CH(OH)CH2- group where the aryl group is 2-allylphenyl, 4-(2- methoxyethyl)phenyl, 1 -naphthyl, or 4-methoxyphenyl.
13. A method for treating diseases mediated by a ╬▓3 adrenergic receptor in a mammal, said method comprising administering to said mammal a therapeutically effective amount of a pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a multibinding compound of Claim 2.
14. A method for treating diseases mediated by a ╬▓3 adrenergic receptor in a mammal, said method comprising administering to said mammal a therapeutically effective amount of a pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a multibinding compound of Claim 5.
15. The method of Claim 14 wherein the disease is obesity.
16. The method of Claim 14 wherein the disease is non- insulin related diabetes.
17. A method for identifying multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties for ╬▓3 adrenergic receptor which method comprises:
(a) identifying a ligand or a mixture of ligands wherein each ligand contains at least one reactive functionality; (b) identifying a library of linkers wherein each linker in said library comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand;
(c) preparing a multimeric ligand compound library by combining at least two stoichiometric equivalents of the ligand or mixture of ligands identified in (a) with the library of linkers identified in (b) under conditions wherein the complementary functional groups react to form a covalent linkage between said linker and at least two of said ligands; and
(d) assaying the multimeric ligand compounds produced in the library prepared in (c) above to identify multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties for ╬▓3 adrenergic receptor.
18. A method for identifying multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties for ╬▓3 adrenergic receptor which method comprises:
(a) identifying a library of ligands wherein each ligand contains at least one reactive functionality;
(b) identifying a linker or mixture of linkers wherein each linker comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand;
(c) preparing a multimeric ligand compound library by combining at least two stoichiometric equivalents of the library of ligands identified in (a) with the linker or mixture of linkers identified in (b) under conditions wherein the complementary functional groups react to form a covalent linkage between said linker and at least two of said ligands; and
(d) assaying the multimeric ligand compounds produced in the library prepared in (c) above to identify multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties for ╬▓3 adrenergic receptor.
19. The method according to Claim 17 or 18 wherein the preparation of the multimeric ligand compound library is achieved by either the sequential or concurrent combination of the two or more stoichiometric equivalents of the ligands identified in (a) with the linkers identified in (b).
20. The method according to Claim 19 wherein the multimeric ligand compounds comprising the multimeric ligand compound library are dimeric.
21. The method according to Claim 20 wherein the dimeric ligand compounds comprising the dimeric ligand compound library are heterodimeric.
22. The method according to Claim 21 wherein the heterodimeric ligand compound library is prepared by sequential addition of a first and second ligand.
23. The method according to Claim 17 or 18 wherein, prior to procedure (d), each member of the multimeric ligand compound library is isolated from the library.
24. The method according to Claim 23 wherein each member of the library is isolated by preparative liquid chromatography mass spectrometry (LCMS).
25. The method according to Claim 17 or Claim 18 wherein the linker or linkers employed are selected from the group comprising flexible linkers, rigid linkers, hydrophobic linkers, hydrophilic linkers, linkers of different geometry, acidic linkers, basic linkers, linkers of different polarization and amphiphilic linkers.
26. The method according to Claim 25 wherein the linkers comprise linkers of different chain length and/or having different complementary reactive groups.
27. The method according to Claim 26 wherein the linkers are selected to have different linker lengths ranging from about 2 to lOOA.
28. The method according to Claim 17 or 18 wherein the ligand or mixture of ligands is selected to have reactive functionality at different sites on said ligands.
29. The method according to Claim 28 wherein said reactive functionality is selected from the group consisting of carboxylic acids, carboxylic acid halides, carboxyl esters, amines, halides, pseudohalides. isocyanates, vinyl unsaturation, ketones, aldehydes, thiols, alcohols, anhydrides, boronates, and precursors thereof wherein the reactive functionality on the ligand is selected to be complementary to at least one of the reactive groups on the linker so that a covalent linkage can be formed between the linker and the ligand.
30. The method according to Claim 17 or Claim 18 wherein the multimeric ligand compound library comprises homomeric ligand compounds.
31. The method according to Claim 17 or Claim 18 wherein the multimeric ligand compound library comprises heteromeric ligand compounds.
32. A library of multimeric ligand compounds which may possess multivalent properties for ╬▓3 adrenergic receptor which library is prepared by the method comprising: (a) identifying a ligand or a mixture of ligands wherein each ligand contains at least one reactive functionality; (b) identifying a library of linkers wherein each linker in said library comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand; and
(c) preparing a multimeric ligand compound library by combining at least two stoichiometric equivalents of the ligand or mixture of ligands identified in (a) with the library of linkers identified in (b) under conditions wherein the complementary functional groups react to form a covalent linkage between said linker and at least two of said ligands.
33. A library of multimeric ligand compounds which may possess multivalent properties for ╬▓3 adrenergic receptor which library is prepared by the method comprising:
(a) identifying a library of ligands wherein each ligand contains at least one reactive functionality; (b) identifying a linker or mixture of linkers wherein each linker comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand; and
(c) preparing a multimeric ligand compound library by combining at least two stoichiometric equivalents of the library of ligands identified in (a) with the linker or mixture of linkers identified in (b) under conditions wherein the complementary functional groups react to form a covalent linkage between said linker and at least two of said ligands.
34. The library according to Claim 32 or Claim 33 wherein the linker or linkers employed are selected from the group comprising flexible linkers, rigid linkers, hydrophobic linkers, hydrophilic linkers, linkers of different geometry, acidic linkers, basic linkers, linkers of different polarization and /or polarizability and amphiphilic linkers.
35. The library according to Claim 34 wherein the linkers comprise linkers of different chain length and/or having different complementary reactive groups.
36. The library according to Claim 35 wherein the linkers are selected to have different linker lengths ranging from about 2 to 100A.
37. The library according to Claim 32 or 33 wherein the ligand or mixture of ligands is selected to have reactive functionality at different sites on said ligands.
38. The library according to Claim 37 wherein said reactive functionality is selected from the group consisting of carboxylic acids, carboxylic acid halides, carboxyl esters, amines, halides, pseudohalides, isocyanates, vinyl unsaturation, ketones, aldehydes, thiols, alcohols, anhydrides, boronates and precursors thereof wherein the reactive functionality on the ligand is selected to be complementary to at least one of the reactive groups on the linker so that a covalent linkage can be formed between the linker and the ligand.
39. The library according to Claim 32 or Claim 33 wherein the multimeric ligand compound library comprises homomeric ligand compounds.
40. The library according to Claim 32 or Claim 33 wherein the multimeric ligand compound library comprises heteromeric ligand compounds.
41. An iterative method for identifying multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties for ╬▓3 adrenergic receptor which method comprises:
(a) preparing a first collection or iteration of multimeric compounds which is prepared by contacting at least two stoichiometric equivalents of the ligand or mixture of ligands which target a receptor with a linker or mixture of linkers wherein said ligand or mixture of ligands comprises at least one reactive functionality and said linker or mixture of linkers comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand wherein said contacting is conducted under conditions wherein the complementary functional groups react to form a covalent linkage between said linker and at least two of said ligands;
(b) assaying said first collection or iteration of multimeric compounds to assess which if any of said multimeric compounds possess multibinding properties for ╬▓3 adrenergic receptor;
(c) repeating the process of (a) and (b) above until at least one multimeric compound is found to possess multibinding properties for ╬▓3 adrenergic receptor;
(d) evaluating what molecular constraints imparted multibinding properties to the multimeric compound or compounds found in the first iteration recited in (a)- (c) above;
(e) creating a second collection or iteration of multimeric compounds which elaborates upon the particular molecular constraints imparting multibinding properties to the multimeric compound or compounds found in said first iteration;
(f) evaluating what molecular constraints imparted enhanced multibinding properties to the multimeric compound or compounds found in the second collection or iteration recited in (e) above;
(g) optionally repeating steps (e) and (f) to further elaborate upon said molecular constraints.
42. The method according to Claim 41 wherein steps (e) and (f) are repeated from 2-50 times.
43. The method according to Claim 42 wherein steps (e) and (f) are repeated from 5-50 times.
PCT/US1999/012907 1998-06-08 1999-06-08 β3-ADRENERGIC RECEPTOR AGONISTS WO1999064053A1 (en)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CA002321120A CA2321120A1 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-08 .beta.3-adrenergic receptor agonists
AU52039/99A AU5203999A (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-08 Beta3-adrenergic receptor agonists
EP99937155A EP1085894A1 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-08 Beta 3-adrenergic receptor agonists

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US8846698P 1998-06-08 1998-06-08
US60/088,466 1998-06-08
US9293898P 1998-07-15 1998-07-15
US60/092,938 1998-07-15

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO1999064053A1 true WO1999064053A1 (en) 1999-12-16

Family

ID=26778693

Family Applications (19)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US1999/011786 WO1999064031A1 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-04 β2-ADRENERGIC RECEPTOR AGONISTS
PCT/US1999/012673 WO1999064038A1 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-07 Novel analgesic agents
PCT/US1999/011804 WO1999064035A1 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-07 β2-ADRENERGIC RECEPTOR AGONISTS
PCT/US1999/012782 WO1999063996A1 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-07 Multivalent agonists, partial agonists, inverse agonists and antagonists of the 5ht2 receptors
PCT/US1999/012728 WO1999064042A1 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-07 Novel therapeutic agents that modulate alpha-1a adrenergic receptors
PCT/US1999/012730 WO1999063933A2 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-07 Multivalent agonists, partial agonists and antagonists of the gaba receptors
PCT/US1999/012669 WO1999063983A1 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-07 MULTIBINDING AGENTS THAT MODULATE PPARη AND RXR RECEPTORS
PCT/US1999/012778 WO1999063993A1 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-07 Multivalent agonists, partial agonists, inverse agonists and antagonists of the d1 receptors
PCT/US1999/012731 WO1999064000A1 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-07 Novel therapeutic agents that modulate neurokinin receptors
PCT/US1999/011803 WO1999064034A1 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-07 β2-ADRENERGIC RECEPTOR AGONISTS
PCT/US1999/012727 WO1999064041A1 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-07 Multibinding agents that modulate nmda receptors
PCT/US1999/011805 WO1999063930A2 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-07 Novel angiotensin receptor modulators and their uses
PCT/US1999/012876 WO1999064052A1 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-08 Novel leukotriene receptor antagonists and their uses
PCT/US1999/012770 WO1999063936A2 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-08 Novel therapeutic agents that modulate endothelin receptors
PCT/US1999/012907 WO1999064053A1 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-08 β3-ADRENERGIC RECEPTOR AGONISTS
PCT/US1999/012994 WO1999064055A1 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-08 Multivalent agonists, partial agonists, inverse agonists and antagonists of the 5ht4 receptors
PCT/US1999/012989 WO1999066944A1 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-08 Methods for identifying novel multimeric agents that modulate receptors
PCT/US1999/012995 WO1999063944A2 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-08 Novel therapeutic agents that modulate estrogen receptors
PCT/US1999/012626 WO1999063999A1 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-08 H1-histamine receptor antagonists

Family Applications Before (14)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US1999/011786 WO1999064031A1 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-04 β2-ADRENERGIC RECEPTOR AGONISTS
PCT/US1999/012673 WO1999064038A1 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-07 Novel analgesic agents
PCT/US1999/011804 WO1999064035A1 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-07 β2-ADRENERGIC RECEPTOR AGONISTS
PCT/US1999/012782 WO1999063996A1 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-07 Multivalent agonists, partial agonists, inverse agonists and antagonists of the 5ht2 receptors
PCT/US1999/012728 WO1999064042A1 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-07 Novel therapeutic agents that modulate alpha-1a adrenergic receptors
PCT/US1999/012730 WO1999063933A2 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-07 Multivalent agonists, partial agonists and antagonists of the gaba receptors
PCT/US1999/012669 WO1999063983A1 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-07 MULTIBINDING AGENTS THAT MODULATE PPARη AND RXR RECEPTORS
PCT/US1999/012778 WO1999063993A1 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-07 Multivalent agonists, partial agonists, inverse agonists and antagonists of the d1 receptors
PCT/US1999/012731 WO1999064000A1 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-07 Novel therapeutic agents that modulate neurokinin receptors
PCT/US1999/011803 WO1999064034A1 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-07 β2-ADRENERGIC RECEPTOR AGONISTS
PCT/US1999/012727 WO1999064041A1 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-07 Multibinding agents that modulate nmda receptors
PCT/US1999/011805 WO1999063930A2 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-07 Novel angiotensin receptor modulators and their uses
PCT/US1999/012876 WO1999064052A1 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-08 Novel leukotriene receptor antagonists and their uses
PCT/US1999/012770 WO1999063936A2 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-08 Novel therapeutic agents that modulate endothelin receptors

Family Applications After (4)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US1999/012994 WO1999064055A1 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-08 Multivalent agonists, partial agonists, inverse agonists and antagonists of the 5ht4 receptors
PCT/US1999/012989 WO1999066944A1 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-08 Methods for identifying novel multimeric agents that modulate receptors
PCT/US1999/012995 WO1999063944A2 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-08 Novel therapeutic agents that modulate estrogen receptors
PCT/US1999/012626 WO1999063999A1 (en) 1998-06-08 1999-06-08 H1-histamine receptor antagonists

Country Status (24)

Country Link
US (5) US6541669B1 (en)
EP (19) EP1003540A1 (en)
JP (9) JP2002517457A (en)
KR (1) KR100593430B1 (en)
CN (1) CN1193788C (en)
AP (1) AP1869A (en)
AR (5) AR031973A1 (en)
AT (1) ATE302748T1 (en)
AU (18) AU4543599A (en)
BR (1) BR9910832A (en)
CA (19) CA2318894A1 (en)
DE (1) DE69926861T2 (en)
DK (1) DK1019075T3 (en)
ES (1) ES2247814T3 (en)
HK (1) HK1029535A1 (en)
HU (1) HUP0201545A3 (en)
IL (1) IL137412A0 (en)
NO (1) NO20006220L (en)
PE (1) PE20000878A1 (en)
PL (1) PL192567B1 (en)
SG (5) SG93205A1 (en)
TR (1) TR200003650T2 (en)
TW (1) TWI252222B (en)
WO (19) WO1999064031A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (191)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6025154A (en) 1995-06-06 2000-02-15 Human Genome Sciences, Inc. Polynucleotides encoding human G-protein chemokine receptor HDGNR10
US6541669B1 (en) 1998-06-08 2003-04-01 Theravance, Inc. β2-adrenergic receptor agonists
US6713651B1 (en) 1999-06-07 2004-03-30 Theravance, Inc. β2-adrenergic receptor agonists
US6998233B2 (en) 1998-06-26 2006-02-14 Sunesis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods for ligand discovery
US6919178B2 (en) 2000-11-21 2005-07-19 Sunesis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Extended tethering approach for rapid identification of ligands
KR100623095B1 (en) * 1998-10-22 2006-09-11 지옥표 Thymol derivatives having anti-tumor activity, and anti-cancer agent comprising the same
US20090216118A1 (en) * 2007-07-26 2009-08-27 Senorx, Inc. Polysaccharide markers
US6593497B1 (en) 1999-06-02 2003-07-15 Theravance, Inc. β2-adrenergic receptor agonists
US6683115B2 (en) 1999-06-02 2004-01-27 Theravance, Inc. β2-adrenergic receptor agonists
JP2003508389A (en) 1999-08-27 2003-03-04 エリ リリー アンド カンパニー Biaryl-oxa (thia) zole derivatives and their use as PPAR modulators
FR2801305B1 (en) * 1999-11-24 2002-12-06 Galderma Res & Dev VITAMIN D ANALOGS
UA73965C2 (en) * 1999-12-08 2005-10-17 Theravance Inc b2 ADRENERGIC RECEPTOR ANTAGONISTS
OA11558A (en) * 1999-12-08 2004-06-03 Advanced Medicine Inc Beta 2-adrenergic receptor agonists.
DE10021106A1 (en) * 2000-05-02 2001-11-08 Univ Stuttgart Polymeric membranes
RU2333757C2 (en) * 2000-06-22 2008-09-20 Новартис Аг Pharmaceutical compositions
US6451814B1 (en) * 2000-07-17 2002-09-17 Wyeth Heterocyclic β-3 adrenergic receptor agonists
CA2423462A1 (en) * 2000-10-05 2002-04-11 Immunex Corporation Nectin polypeptides, polynucleotides, methods of making and use thereof
SE0004782D0 (en) * 2000-12-22 2000-12-22 Schmidt Ann Christin Koch blocking agents
US6451813B1 (en) 2001-01-26 2002-09-17 R. T. Alamo Ventures I, Llc Treatment of gastroparesis in certain patient groups
DE10111843A1 (en) * 2001-03-13 2002-09-19 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharma Compounds for the treatment of inflammatory diseases
WO2002083127A1 (en) * 2001-04-09 2002-10-24 Tokai University Educational System Protein modification-inhibitory compositions
US20030083339A1 (en) * 2001-04-26 2003-05-01 Masaaki Tamura Compositions and methods for treating colorectal polyps and cancer
AU783516B2 (en) * 2001-04-30 2005-11-03 Warner-Lambert Company Methods, kits and compositions for using pyrrole derivatives
EP1293198B1 (en) * 2001-09-14 2005-02-09 Schwarz Pharma Ag Device for transdermal administration for the treatment of urinary tract disorders
UA78529C2 (en) 2001-10-10 2007-04-10 Wyeth Corp Derivatives of [[2-(amino-3,4-dioxo-1-cyclobutene-1-yl)amino]alkyl] acid for treating pain
US7220877B2 (en) 2001-10-17 2007-05-22 Novo Nordisk A/S Compounds, their preparation and use
TWI249515B (en) * 2001-11-13 2006-02-21 Theravance Inc Aryl aniline beta2 adrenergic receptor agonists
US6653323B2 (en) 2001-11-13 2003-11-25 Theravance, Inc. Aryl aniline β2 adrenergic receptor agonists
US20030229058A1 (en) * 2001-11-13 2003-12-11 Moran Edmund J. Aryl aniline beta2 adrenergic receptor agonists
CN1639166A (en) * 2002-02-28 2005-07-13 马林克罗特公司 Method and system for separation and purification of at least one narcotic alkaloid using reverse phase preparative chromatography
US8623822B2 (en) 2002-03-01 2014-01-07 Bracco Suisse Sa KDR and VEGF/KDR binding peptides and their use in diagnosis and therapy
US7261876B2 (en) 2002-03-01 2007-08-28 Bracco International Bv Multivalent constructs for therapeutic and diagnostic applications
US7794693B2 (en) 2002-03-01 2010-09-14 Bracco International B.V. Targeting vector-phospholipid conjugates
EP1587944A4 (en) 2002-03-01 2007-03-21 Dyax Corp Kdr and vegf/kdr binding peptides and their use in diagnosis and therapy
AUPS127202A0 (en) * 2002-03-20 2002-04-18 Walter And Eliza Hall Institute Of Medical Research, The Therapeutic ion channel blocking agents and methods of use thereof
GB0211230D0 (en) 2002-05-16 2002-06-26 Medinnova Sf Treatment of heart failure
WO2003099764A1 (en) 2002-05-28 2003-12-04 Theravance, Inc. ALKOXY ARYL β2 ADRENERGIC RECEPTOR AGONISTS
AR040661A1 (en) * 2002-07-26 2005-04-13 Theravance Inc CRYSTAL DICHLORHYDRATE OF N- {2 - [- ((R) -2-HYDROXI-2-PHENYLETHYLAMINE) PHENYL] ETIL} - (R) -2 HYDROXY-2- (3-FORMAMIDE-4-HYDROXYPHENYL) ETHYLAMINE, RECEIVER AGONIST BETA 2 ADRENERGIC
TW200420573A (en) * 2002-09-26 2004-10-16 Rib X Pharmaceuticals Inc Bifunctional heterocyclic compounds and methods of making and using same
DE10251170A1 (en) * 2002-10-31 2004-05-13 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharma Gmbh & Co. Kg New beta agonists, processes for their production and their use as medicines
US7816385B2 (en) 2002-12-20 2010-10-19 High Point Pharmaceuticals, Llc Dimeric dicarboxylic acid derivatives, their preparation and use
PE20040950A1 (en) * 2003-02-14 2005-01-01 Theravance Inc BIPHENYL DERIVATIVES AS AGONISTS OF ß2-ADRENERGIC RECEPTORS AND AS ANTAGONISTS OF MUSCARINAL RECEPTORS
CN100378092C (en) * 2003-02-14 2008-04-02 施万制药 Biphenyl derivatives
TWI324150B (en) * 2003-02-28 2010-05-01 Novartis Ag Process for preparing 5-[(r)-2-(5,6-diethyl-indan-2-ylamino)-1-hydroxy-ethyl]-8-hydroxy-(1h)-quinolin-2-one salt
JP2006523229A (en) * 2003-03-05 2006-10-12 リブ−エックス ファーマシューティカルズ，インコーポレイテッド Bifunctional heterocyclic compounds and methods for their production and use
JP4767842B2 (en) * 2003-04-01 2011-09-07 セラヴァンス， インコーポレーテッド Diarylmethyl compounds and related compounds having β2 adrenergic receptor agonist activity and muscarinic receptor antagonist activity
CA2521313A1 (en) 2003-04-09 2004-10-28 Wyeth Derivatives of 2-(8,9-dioxo-2,6-diazabicyclo(5.2.o)non-1(7)-3n-2-yl)-al kyl phosphonic acid and their use as n-methyl-d-aspartate (nmda) recetor antagonists
JP4467910B2 (en) * 2003-05-16 2010-05-26 東芝モバイルディスプレイ株式会社 Active matrix display device
TW200510277A (en) * 2003-05-27 2005-03-16 Theravance Inc Crystalline form of β2-adrenergic receptor agonist
US7358244B2 (en) * 2003-05-28 2008-04-15 Theravance, Inc. Azabicycloalkane compounds
TW200526547A (en) * 2003-09-22 2005-08-16 Theravance Inc Amino-substituted ethylamino β2 adrenergic receptor agonists
TW200514775A (en) 2003-10-22 2005-05-01 Wyeth Corp Methods for the preparation of {2-[(8,9)-dioxo-2,6-diaza-bicyclo[5.2.0]-non-1(7)-en-2-yl]ethyl} phosphonic acid and esters thereof
EP1682563A1 (en) * 2003-10-30 2006-07-26 Rib-X Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Bifunctional macrolide heterocyclic compounds and mehtods of making and using the same
JP2007512256A (en) * 2003-11-18 2007-05-17 リブ−エックス ファーマシューティカルズ，インコーポレイテッド Bifunctional macrolide heterocyclic compounds, methods of producing them and methods of using them
TW200531692A (en) * 2004-01-12 2005-10-01 Theravance Inc Aryl aniline derivatives as β2 adrenergic receptor agonists
GB0401334D0 (en) 2004-01-21 2004-02-25 Novartis Ag Organic compounds
JP4036343B2 (en) 2004-01-22 2008-01-23 ファイザー・インク Sulfonamide derivatives for the treatment of diseases
EA011167B1 (en) 2004-01-22 2009-02-27 Пфайзер Инк. Sulfonamide derivatives for the treatment of diseases
WO2005080375A1 (en) * 2004-02-13 2005-09-01 Theravance, Inc. Crystalline form of a biphenyl compound
JP5383037B2 (en) * 2004-02-27 2014-01-08 リブ−エックス ファーマシューティカルズ，インコーポレイテッド Macrocyclic compounds and methods of making and using them
GB0411056D0 (en) 2004-05-18 2004-06-23 Novartis Ag Organic compounds
US20080039495A1 (en) * 2004-06-03 2008-02-14 Linsell Martin S Diamine Beta2 Adrenergic Receptor Agonists
JP2008501797A (en) * 2004-06-08 2008-01-24 マリンクロッド・インコーポレイテッド Extraction of alkaloids from opium
KR100875558B1 (en) 2004-06-15 2008-12-23 화이자 인코포레이티드 Benzimidazolone Carboxylic Acid Derivatives
US7737163B2 (en) 2004-06-15 2010-06-15 Pfizer Inc. Benzimidazolone carboxylic acid derivatives
US7781478B2 (en) 2004-07-14 2010-08-24 Ptc Therapeutics, Inc. Methods for treating hepatitis C
EP1778638A1 (en) * 2004-07-21 2007-05-02 Theravance, Inc. Diaryl ether beta2 adrenergic receptor agonists
TWI374883B (en) 2004-08-16 2012-10-21 Theravance Inc Crystalline form of a biphenyl compound
JP2008510015A (en) * 2004-08-16 2008-04-03 セラヴァンス， インコーポレーテッド Compounds having β2 adrenergic receptor agonist activity and muscarinic receptor antagonist activity
EP1778626A1 (en) * 2004-08-16 2007-05-02 Theravance, Inc. Compounds having beta2 adrenergic receptor agonist and muscarinic receptor antagonist activity
US7566785B2 (en) * 2004-09-10 2009-07-28 Theravance, Inc. Amidine substituted aryl aniline compounds
GT200500281A (en) 2004-10-22 2006-04-24 Novartis Ag ORGANIC COMPOUNDS.
GB0424284D0 (en) 2004-11-02 2004-12-01 Novartis Ag Organic compounds
GB0426164D0 (en) 2004-11-29 2004-12-29 Novartis Ag Organic compounds
EP1856110B1 (en) 2005-02-22 2011-06-22 Pfizer Inc. Oxyindole derivatives as 5ht4 receptor agonists
WO2006105401A2 (en) 2005-03-30 2006-10-05 Schering Corporation Medicaments and methods combining an anticholinergic, a corticosteroid, and a long acting beta agonist
GB0507577D0 (en) 2005-04-14 2005-05-18 Novartis Ag Organic compounds
JP2008536866A (en) * 2005-04-15 2008-09-11 ボード、オブ、トラスティーズ、オブ、ミシガン、ステイト、ユニバーシティ Aminergic pharmaceutical compositions and methods
ES2265276B1 (en) * 2005-05-20 2008-02-01 Laboratorios Almirall S.A. DERIVATIVES OF 4- (2-AMINO-1-HYDROXYETHYL) Phenol as agonists of the BETA2 ADRENERGIC RECEIVER.
US8429052B2 (en) * 2005-07-19 2013-04-23 Lincoln National Life Insurance Company Method and system for providing employer-sponsored retirement plan
JP2009504624A (en) 2005-08-08 2009-02-05 アージェンタ ディスカバリー リミテッド Bicyclo [2.2.1] hept-7-ylamine derivatives and uses thereof
GB0516313D0 (en) 2005-08-08 2005-09-14 Argenta Discovery Ltd Azole derivatives and their uses
TW200738658A (en) 2005-08-09 2007-10-16 Astrazeneca Ab Novel compounds
US7855196B2 (en) 2005-08-22 2010-12-21 Pierre Mainville Composition comprising a benzodiazepine agonist and a benzodiazepine antagonist
KR20080049113A (en) 2005-10-21 2008-06-03 노파르티스 아게 Human antibodies against il-13 and therapeutic uses
EP1954285A2 (en) * 2005-10-25 2008-08-13 Alvine Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Transglutaminase inhibitors and methods of use thereof
CA2625210A1 (en) * 2005-10-31 2007-05-10 Braincells, Inc. Gaba receptor mediated modulation of neurogenesis
GB0601951D0 (en) 2006-01-31 2006-03-15 Novartis Ag Organic compounds
GB0602778D0 (en) * 2006-02-10 2006-03-22 Glaxo Group Ltd Novel compound
KR100643519B1 (en) * 2006-02-13 2006-11-13 주식회사 시드컴 Remote control device for camera cellular phone and control method
TW200745163A (en) * 2006-02-17 2007-12-16 Syntonix Pharmaceuticals Inc Peptides that block the binding of IgG to FcRn
WO2007100880A1 (en) * 2006-02-28 2007-09-07 Amgen Inc. Cinnoline and quinazoline derivates as phosphodiesterase 10 inhibitors
TW200745084A (en) * 2006-03-08 2007-12-16 Astrazeneca Ab Novel compounds
TW200745067A (en) 2006-03-14 2007-12-16 Astrazeneca Ab Novel compounds
ES2440317T3 (en) 2006-04-21 2014-01-28 Novartis Ag Purine derivatives for use as adenosine A2A receptor agonists
TW200811105A (en) 2006-04-25 2008-03-01 Theravance Inc Dialkylphenyl compounds having beta2 adrenergic receptor agonist and muscarinic receptor antagonist activity
WO2007127809A2 (en) * 2006-04-27 2007-11-08 Kuldeep Razden P8 modulation to control hypertension
JP2010503687A (en) * 2006-09-15 2010-02-04 ザ バーナム インスティチュート High affinity EphB receptor binding compounds and methods of use thereof
ES2302447B1 (en) * 2006-10-20 2009-06-12 Laboratorios Almirall S.A. DERIVATIVES OF 4- (2-AMINO-1-HYDROXYETHYL) Phenol as agonists of the BETA2 ADRENERGIC RECEIVER.
TW200833670A (en) 2006-12-20 2008-08-16 Astrazeneca Ab Novel compounds 569
MX2009007476A (en) 2007-01-10 2009-07-22 Irm Llc Compounds and compositions as channel activating protease inhibitors.
EP2117538A1 (en) 2007-01-24 2009-11-18 Glaxo Group Limited Pharmaceutical compositions comprising 2-methoxy-5- (5-trifluoromethyl-tetrazol-i-yl-benzyl) - (2s-phenyl-piperidin-3s-yl-)
GB0702458D0 (en) 2007-02-08 2007-03-21 Astrazeneca Ab Salts 668
ES2306595B1 (en) 2007-02-09 2009-09-11 Laboratorios Almirall S.A. NAPADISYLATE SALT OF 5- (2 - ((6- (2,2-DIFLUORO-2-PHENYLETOXI) HEXIL) AMINO) -1-HYDROXYETHYL) -8-HYDROXYCHINOLIN-2 (1H) -ONE AS ADRENERGIC RECEIVER AGONIST BETA2 .
MX2009008493A (en) 2007-02-09 2009-08-20 Irm Llc Compounds and compositions as channel activating protease inhibitors.
CA2679070C (en) * 2007-03-12 2016-04-26 Nektar Therapeutics Oligomer-antihistamine conjugates
US11241420B2 (en) 2007-04-11 2022-02-08 Omeros Corporation Compositions and methods for prophylaxis and treatment of addictions
US20160331729A9 (en) 2007-04-11 2016-11-17 Omeros Corporation Compositions and methods for prophylaxis and treatment of addictions
EP3053440B1 (en) 2007-04-11 2020-08-12 Omeros Corporation Compositions and methods for prophylaxis and treatment of addictions
PE20090733A1 (en) 2007-05-07 2009-07-17 Novartis Ag PIRAZINE DERIVATIVES AS BLOCKERS OF EPITHELIAL SODIUM CHANNELS
BRPI0814763A2 (en) * 2007-08-09 2015-03-03 Syntonix Pharmaceuticals Inc IMMUNOMODULATING PEPTIDES
US8119629B2 (en) 2007-10-03 2012-02-21 Bristol-Meyers Squibb Company Carboxamide GABAA α2 modulators
ES2320961B1 (en) * 2007-11-28 2010-03-17 Laboratorios Almirall, S.A. DERIVATIVES OF 4- (2-AMINO-1-HYDROXYETHYL) PHENOL AS BETA2 ADRENERGIC RECEIVER AGONISTS.
KR101578235B1 (en) 2007-12-10 2015-12-16 노파르티스 아게 Oarganic compounds
AU2008345573B2 (en) 2007-12-20 2013-12-19 Envivo Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Tetrasubstituted benzenes
WO2009087224A1 (en) 2008-01-11 2009-07-16 Novartis Ag Pyrimidines as kinase inhibitors
EP2096105A1 (en) * 2008-02-28 2009-09-02 Laboratorios Almirall, S.A. Derivatives of 4-(2-amino-1-hydroxyethyl)phenol as agonists of the b2 adrenergic receptor
US20120021967A1 (en) * 2008-04-23 2012-01-26 Arizona Board of Regents, A Body Corporate of the State Of Arizona Acting for and Behalf of Arizona Synthetic antibodies
KR20110040818A (en) 2008-06-10 2011-04-20 노파르티스 아게 Pyrazine derivatives as epithelial sodium channel blockers
WO2009154557A1 (en) 2008-06-18 2009-12-23 Astrazeneca Ab Benzoxazinone derivatives acting as beta2-adrenoreceptor agonist for the treatment of respiratory disorders
US20100048488A1 (en) * 2008-08-01 2010-02-25 Syntonix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Immunomodulatory peptides
US8236786B2 (en) 2008-08-07 2012-08-07 Pulmagen Therapeutics (Inflammation) Limited Respiratory disease treatment
US9198952B2 (en) 2008-09-22 2015-12-01 The Brigham And Women's Hospital, Inc. Compositions of and methods of using ligand dimers
TWI478712B (en) 2008-09-30 2015-04-01 Astellas Pharma Inc Pharmaceutical composition for modified release
CN105879047A (en) 2008-12-16 2016-08-24 建新公司 Oligosaccharide-protein conjugates
UY32297A (en) 2008-12-22 2010-05-31 Almirall Sa MESILATE SALT OF 5- (2 - {[6- (2,2-DIFLUORO-2-PHENYLITOXI) HEXIL] AMINO} -1-HYDROXYETHYL) -8-HYDROXYCHINOLIN-2 (1H) -ONA AS A RECEIVER AGONIST B (BETA ) 2 ACRENERGIC
DK2376101T3 (en) 2008-12-29 2016-01-18 Trevena Inc BETA-arrestin effectors AND COMPOSITIONS AND METHODS FOR USE THEREOF
ES2442343T3 (en) 2008-12-30 2014-02-11 Pulmagen Therapeutics (Inflammation) Limited Sulfonamide compounds for the treatment of respiratory disorders
EP2228368A1 (en) 2009-03-12 2010-09-15 Almirall, S.A. Process for manufacturing 5-(2-{[6-(2,2-difluoro-2-phenylethoxy) hexyl]amino}-1-hydroxyethyl)-8-hydroxyquinolin-2(1H)-one
SI2421849T1 (en) 2009-04-23 2013-07-31 Theravance, Inc. Diamide compounds having muscarinic receptor antagonist and beta2 adrenergic receptor agonist activity
WO2010150014A1 (en) 2009-06-24 2010-12-29 Pulmagen Therapeutics (Inflammation) Limited 5r- 5 -deuterated glitazones for respiratory disease treatment
EP2490687A1 (en) 2009-10-22 2012-08-29 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compositions for treatment of cystic fibrosis and other chronic diseases
GB0918924D0 (en) 2009-10-28 2009-12-16 Vantia Ltd Azaindole derivatives
GB0918923D0 (en) 2009-10-28 2009-12-16 Vantia Ltd Aminothiazole derivatives
GB0918922D0 (en) 2009-10-28 2009-12-16 Vantia Ltd Aminopyridine derivatives
WO2011098746A1 (en) 2010-02-09 2011-08-18 Pulmagen Therapeutics (Inflammation) Limited Crystalline acid addition salts of ( 5r) -enanti0mer of pioglitazone
GB201002224D0 (en) 2010-02-10 2010-03-31 Argenta Therapeutics Ltd Respiratory disease treatment
GB201002243D0 (en) 2010-02-10 2010-03-31 Argenta Therapeutics Ltd Respiratory disease treatment
US8247436B2 (en) 2010-03-19 2012-08-21 Novartis Ag Pyridine and pyrazine derivative for the treatment of CF
WO2011119836A1 (en) 2010-03-24 2011-09-29 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Methods and compositions for cardioprotection and cardioregeneration
WO2012032546A2 (en) * 2010-09-08 2012-03-15 Cadila Healthcare Limited Process for the preparation of salmeterol and its intermediates
US8637516B2 (en) 2010-09-09 2014-01-28 Irm Llc Compounds and compositions as TRK inhibitors
WO2012034095A1 (en) 2010-09-09 2012-03-15 Irm Llc Compounds and compositions as trk inhibitors
US8372845B2 (en) 2010-09-17 2013-02-12 Novartis Ag Pyrazine derivatives as enac blockers
CA2822357A1 (en) 2010-12-22 2012-06-28 Abbvie Inc. Hepatitis c inhibitors and uses thereof
MA34969B1 (en) 2011-02-25 2014-03-01 Irm Llc COMPOUNDS AND COMPOSITIONS AS TRK INHIBITORS
UY34305A (en) 2011-09-01 2013-04-30 Novartis Ag DERIVATIVES OF BICYCLIC HETEROCICLES FOR THE TREATMENT OF PULMONARY ARTERIAL HYPERTENSION
WO2013038373A1 (en) 2011-09-16 2013-03-21 Novartis Ag Pyridine amide derivatives
WO2013038381A1 (en) 2011-09-16 2013-03-21 Novartis Ag Pyridine/pyrazine amide derivatives
WO2013038378A1 (en) 2011-09-16 2013-03-21 Novartis Ag Pyridine amide derivatives
CN103946221B (en) 2011-09-16 2016-08-03 诺华股份有限公司 For treating the heterocyclic compound of cystic fibrosis
EP2755652B1 (en) 2011-09-16 2021-06-02 Novartis AG N-substituted heterocyclyl carboxamides
EP2578570A1 (en) 2011-10-07 2013-04-10 Almirall, S.A. Novel process for preparing 5-(2-{[6-(2,2-difluoro-2-phenylethoxy)hexyl]amino}-1(r)-hydroxyethyl)-8-hydroxyquinolin-2(1h)-one via novel intermediates of synthesis.
AU2013215269A1 (en) 2012-01-31 2014-08-21 Trevena, Inc. Beta-arrestin effectors and compositions and methods of use thereof
US8809340B2 (en) 2012-03-19 2014-08-19 Novartis Ag Crystalline form
EP2641900A1 (en) 2012-03-20 2013-09-25 Almirall, S.A. Novel polymorphic Crystal forms of 5-(2-{[6-(2,2-difluoro-2-phenylethoxy) hexyl]amino}-1-(R)-hydroxyethyl)-8-hydroxyquinolin-2(1h)-one, heminapadisylate as agonist of the ß2 adrenergic receptor.
AU2013255050B2 (en) 2012-05-01 2016-07-28 Translatum Medicus Inc. Methods for treating and diagnosing blinding eye diseases
JP6389176B2 (en) 2012-08-21 2018-09-12 ヤンセン ファーマシューティカ エヌ．ベー． Antibodies against aripiprazole hapten and use thereof
AU2013305938B2 (en) 2012-08-21 2017-08-17 Saladax Biomedical Inc. Antibodies to paliperidone haptens and use thereof
CN104736565B (en) 2012-08-21 2019-03-12 詹森药业有限公司 The antibody and application thereof of Risperidone haptens
ES2666000T3 (en) 2012-08-21 2018-04-30 Janssen Pharmaceutica, N.V. Antibodies to aripiprazole and use thereof
JP6389177B2 (en) 2012-08-21 2018-09-12 ヤンセン ファーマシューティカ エヌ．ベー． Antibodies against olanzapine hapten and use thereof
CN104736561B (en) 2012-08-21 2018-06-12 詹森药业有限公司 Antibody of Paliperidone and application thereof
CN107043424B (en) 2012-08-21 2021-03-16 詹森药业有限公司 Antibodies to risperidone and uses thereof
PL2888286T3 (en) 2012-08-21 2018-07-31 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Antibodies to quetiapine haptens and use thereof
EP2888590B1 (en) 2012-08-21 2020-07-08 Janssen Pharmaceutica NV Antibodies to olanzapine and use thereof
CA2882615C (en) 2012-08-21 2019-07-09 Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc. Antibodies to quetiapine and use thereof
EP2724723A1 (en) * 2012-10-25 2014-04-30 Universitätsklinikum Hamburg-Eppendorf Tegaserod for use in the treatment of nerve injuries
US9073921B2 (en) 2013-03-01 2015-07-07 Novartis Ag Salt forms of bicyclic heterocyclic derivatives
WO2015017575A2 (en) 2013-08-01 2015-02-05 Dignify Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions and methods for inducing urinary voiding and defecation
AU2014321397C1 (en) 2013-09-20 2019-08-01 Biomarin Pharmaceutical Inc. Glucosylceramide synthase inhibitors for the treatment of diseases
DK3071206T3 (en) 2013-11-22 2021-05-25 CL BioSciences LLC GASTRINE ANTAGONISTS (EG YF476, NETAZEPID) FOR THE TREATMENT AND PREVENTION OF OSTEOPOROSIS
JP2017506235A (en) 2014-02-07 2017-03-02 トレベナ・インコーポレイテッドＴｒｅｖｅｎａ， Ｉｎｃ． Crystalline and amorphous forms of beta-arrestin effectors
PL3134396T3 (en) 2014-04-24 2020-04-30 Novartis Ag Amino pyridine derivatives as phosphatidylinositol 3-kinase inhibitors
CN106458966B (en) 2014-04-24 2019-05-07 诺华股份有限公司 Pyrazines derivatives as inhibitors of phosphatidylinositol3 3-kinase
BR112016024533A8 (en) 2014-04-24 2021-03-30 Novartis Ag amino pyrazine derivatives as phosphatidylinositol 3-kinase or salt inhibitors, their use, and pharmaceutical composition and combination
AU2015264367A1 (en) 2014-05-19 2016-12-15 Trevena, Inc. Synthesis of Beta-Arrestin Effectors
CN106336406B (en) * 2015-07-10 2020-01-03 四川海思科制药有限公司 Having beta2Octahydropentalene derivatives with receptor agonistic and M receptor antagonistic activity and their medical use
JP6949025B2 (en) 2015-12-17 2021-10-13 ヤンセン ファーマシューティカ エヌ．ベー． Antibodies to risperidone and its use
US10435478B2 (en) 2015-12-17 2019-10-08 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Antibodies to quetiapine and use thereof
EA038109B1 (en) 2016-03-01 2021-07-07 Пропеллон Терапьютикс Инк. Inhibitors of wdr5 protein-protein binding
WO2017147701A1 (en) 2016-03-01 2017-09-08 Ontario Institute For Cancer Research (Oicr) Inhibitors of wdr5 protein-protein binding
CN108508117A (en) * 2017-02-24 2018-09-07 扬子江药业集团江苏紫龙药业有限公司 The related substance control method of Rupatadine fumarate piece
WO2019238962A1 (en) 2018-06-14 2019-12-19 University College Cork - National University Of Ireland, Cork Peptide for disease treatment
AU2020290094B2 (en) 2019-06-10 2024-01-18 Novartis Ag Pyridine and pyrazine derivative for the treatment of CF, COPD, and bronchiectasis
CN110169969B (en) * 2019-06-28 2022-05-27 南京医科大学 Application of MK571 in preparation of medicine for preventing and treating heart diseases
UY38860A (en) 2019-08-28 2021-02-26 Novartis Ag SUBSTITUTE 1,3-FENYL HETEROARYL DERIVATIVES, COMPOSITIONS FOR USE IN THE TREATMENT OF DISEASES AND CRYSTALLINE FORMS
US12087410B2 (en) * 2019-10-11 2024-09-10 Arium BioLabs LLC Systems and methods of designing chemical libraries for allosteric modulator discovery
TW202140550A (en) 2020-01-29 2021-11-01 瑞士商諾華公司 Methods of treating an inflammatory or obstructive airway disease using anti-tslp antibody
CN112125924B (en) * 2020-09-15 2021-09-24 吉林大学 Spiral oligomer, bionic ion channel, preparation method and application
US12097189B1 (en) 2024-02-09 2024-09-24 Astellas Pharma Inc. Pharmaceutical composition for modified release

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4304721A (en) * 1979-09-06 1981-12-08 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Adrenergic blocking agents
US4587046A (en) * 1982-05-18 1986-05-06 The Regents Of The University Of California Drug-carrier conjugates

Family Cites Families (87)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
DE1158082B (en) 1960-12-17 1963-11-28 Gruenenthal Chemie Process for the preparation of alkylenediamine derivatives and their salts
DE1250450B (en) 1962-03-31 1967-09-21 Deutsche Gold- und Silber-Scheideanstalt vormals Roessler, Frankfurt/M Process for the production of amino alcohols and their acid addition salts and quaternary ammonium compounds
NL130078C (en) 1963-06-11
DE1215729B (en) 1963-06-14 1966-05-05 Lentia Gmbh Process for the production of new bis-alkanolamine derivatives and their salts
DE1802945C3 (en) 1968-10-14 1974-03-07 Lentia Gmbh, Chem. U. Pharm. Erzeugnisse - Industriebedarf, 8000 Muenchen L-O-N ^ bis-square bracket on 2- (3 ', 4'-dihydroxyphenyl) -2-hydroxyäthyl square bracket on -hexamethylenediamine, its acid addition salts and process for the preparation of these compounds
AT294046B (en) 1969-07-08 1971-11-10 Chemie Linz Ag Process for the preparation of N, N'-bis [2- (3 ', 4'-dihydroxyphenyl) -2-hydroxyethyl] -hexamethylenediamine, its optically active forms and the salts thereof
DE1935757B1 (en) 1969-07-14 1970-11-12 Lentia Gmbh Process for the preparation of the N, N'-bis- [2- (3 ', 4'-dihydroxyphenyl) -2-hydroxyaethyl] -hexamethylene diamine, its optically active forms and their salts
DE1936419C3 (en) 1969-07-17 1975-07-10 Lentia Gmbh, Chem. U. Pharm. Erzeugnisse - Industriebedarf, 8000 Muenchen Process for the preparation of bis-alkanolamine derivatives and their salts
AT310146B (en) 1971-04-26 1973-09-25 Boehringer Sohn Ingelheim Process for the production of new N, N'-bis- (β-hydroxyarylethyl) -diaminoalkanes and their acid addition salts
ZA723611B (en) 1971-06-01 1973-03-28 Smith Kline French Lab N,n'-bis(2-(3-substituted-4-hydroxyphenyl)-ethyl or-2-hydroxyethyl)-polymethylene-diamines
CH545764A (en) 1971-07-27 1974-02-15
BE786713A (en) 1971-07-27 1973-01-25 Sandoz Sa NEW AMINO-ALCOHOLS, THEIR PREPARATION AND THEIR APPLICATION AS MEDICINAL PRODUCTS
BE794414A (en) 1972-01-25 1973-07-23 Sandoz Sa NEW AMINO-ALCOHOLS, THEIR PREPARATION AND THEIR APPLICATION AS A MEDICINAL PRODUCT
DE2305092A1 (en) 1972-02-05 1973-08-16 Yamanouchi Pharma Co Ltd Alpha-aminomethylbenzyl alcohol derivs. - prepd. by redn. of corresponding protected derivs.
AT322534B (en) 1972-03-16 1975-05-26 Thomae Gmbh Dr K PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF NEW OPTICALLY ACTIVE 1- (4'-AMINO-3'-HALOGENPHENYL) -2-AMINO ETHANOLS AND THEIR ACID ADDITION SALTS
DE2303304A1 (en) 1973-01-24 1973-08-02 Sandoz Ag Bis (hydroxy phenyl ethanolamine or propanolamine) cpds - - bronchodilators
DE2312234A1 (en) 1973-03-12 1974-09-19 Boehringer Sohn Ingelheim Hexamethylene-diamine derivs from 1,6-hexane-diamine - esp. N,N'-bis (2-(3,4-dihydroxyphenyl)-2-hydroxyethyl)- deriv
US4228237A (en) * 1978-09-21 1980-10-14 Calbiochem-Behring Corp. Methods for the detection and determination of ligands
US4312870A (en) * 1979-06-21 1982-01-26 Ciba-Geigy Corporation Pyrazoloquinolines
US4888356A (en) * 1983-08-08 1989-12-19 G. D. Searle And Company Use of substituted dihydrobenzopyrans for allergy and inflammation
US4665203A (en) * 1983-08-08 1987-05-12 G. D. Searle & Co. Substituted dihydrobenzopyrans useful as leukotriene D4 inhibitors
CA1337429C (en) 1983-12-05 1995-10-24 Guy Rosalia Eugene Van Lommen Derivatives of 2,2'-iminobisethanol
US4695575A (en) * 1984-11-13 1987-09-22 Janssen Pharmaceutica, N.V. 4-[(bicycle heterocyclyl)-methyl and -hetero]-piperidines
FR2562539B1 (en) * 1984-04-06 1987-04-17 Chauvin Blache Lab NOVEL VINYL-4 BENZOIC ACID DERIVATIVES, PREPARATION METHOD THEREOF AND THERAPEUTIC APPLICATIONS THEREOF AND AS LIGANDS
US4910152A (en) * 1985-01-31 1990-03-20 Meyers Vera K Method for binding opioid receptors
GB8507942D0 (en) 1985-03-27 1985-05-01 Beecham Group Plc Compounds
DK9987A (en) 1986-01-11 1987-07-12 Beecham Group Plc ETHANOLAMINE DERIVATIVES
US5428163A (en) * 1986-12-31 1995-06-27 Mills; Randell L. Prodrugs for selective drug delivery
NL8800823A (en) * 1987-04-10 1988-11-01 Sandoz Ag METHOD FOR USING DOPAMINE RECEPTOR AGONISTS AND PHARMACEUTICAL PREPARATIONS CONTAINING THESE AGONISTS
GB8928208D0 (en) * 1989-12-13 1990-02-14 Glaxo Group Ltd Medicaments
AU8730691A (en) 1990-09-28 1992-04-28 Neorx Corporation Polymeric carriers for release of covalently linked agents
US5744602A (en) * 1990-10-31 1998-04-28 Neurogen Corporation Certain imidazoquinoxalines; a new class of GABA brain receptor ligands
US5416191A (en) * 1991-04-01 1995-05-16 Cortech, Inc. Bradykinin antagonists
US5683998A (en) * 1991-04-23 1997-11-04 Toray Industries, Inc. Tricyclic triazolo derivatives, processes for producing the same and the uses of the same
AU2031692A (en) * 1991-07-22 1993-01-28 Zyma S.A. Arylalkylamine derivatives
CA2118798A1 (en) * 1991-09-12 1993-03-18 Francis D. King Azabicyclic compounds as 5-ht4 receptor antagonists
ES2097925T3 (en) 1991-09-18 1997-04-16 Affymax Tech Nv METHOD FOR SYNTHESIZING DIFFERENT OLIGOMER COLLECTIONS.
JP3476193B2 (en) * 1992-05-26 2003-12-10 パーデュー・リサーチ・ファウンデーション Substituted hexahydrobenzo [α] phenanthridines
US5434174A (en) * 1992-07-17 1995-07-18 Eli Lilly And Company Isoxazole derivatives for the treatment of irritable bowel syndrome
US5783701A (en) * 1992-09-08 1998-07-21 Vertex Pharmaceuticals, Incorporated Sulfonamide inhibitors of aspartyl protease
US5726187A (en) * 1992-10-16 1998-03-10 Smithkline Beecham Plc N-alkylpiperidinyl-4-methyl carboxylic esters/amides of condensed ring systems as 5-HT4 receptor antagonists
DE69328975T2 (en) * 1992-12-10 2000-11-09 Pfizer Inc., New York AMINOMETHYLENE SUBSTITUTED HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS AND THEIR USE AS ALSO SUBSTANCE P ANTAGONISTS
GB9305718D0 (en) * 1993-03-19 1993-05-05 Glaxo Group Ltd Medicaments
US5334598A (en) * 1993-03-19 1994-08-02 Merck & Co., Inc. Six-membered ring fused imidazoles substituted with phenoxyphenylacetic acid derivatives
FR2712591B1 (en) * 1993-11-19 1996-02-09 Pf Medicament New arylpiperazines derived from indole, their preparation and their therapeutic use.
CA2179315A1 (en) * 1993-12-17 1995-06-22 Roger S. Cubicciotti Nucleotide-directed assembly of bimolecular and multimolecular drugs and devices
US5538965A (en) * 1993-12-23 1996-07-23 Allelix Biopharmaceuticals Inc. Dopamine receptor ligands
FR2715565B1 (en) * 1994-01-31 1996-03-15 Oreal Stabilized cosmetic or dermatological composition containing several precursors of the same active ingredient to maximize its release, its use.
US5688997A (en) * 1994-05-06 1997-11-18 Pharmacopeia, Inc. Process for preparing intermediates for a combinatorial dihydrobenzopyran library
US5463564A (en) 1994-09-16 1995-10-31 3-Dimensional Pharmaceuticals, Inc. System and method of automatically generating chemical compounds with desired properties
KR100517210B1 (en) * 1994-12-12 2006-06-07 오메로스 코포레이션 Infusion solution for pain, inflammation and spasm
US5837815A (en) * 1994-12-15 1998-11-17 Sugen, Inc. PYK2 related polypeptide products
US5902726A (en) * 1994-12-23 1999-05-11 Glaxo Wellcome Inc. Activators of the nuclear orphan receptor peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor gamma
CZ287513B6 (en) 1994-12-28 2000-12-13 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Nebivolol functioning as anti-atherogenic agent
GB9505692D0 (en) * 1995-03-21 1995-05-10 Glaxo Group Ltd Chemical compounds
US5876727A (en) * 1995-03-31 1999-03-02 Immulogic Pharmaceutical Corporation Hapten-carrier conjugates for use in drug-abuse therapy and methods for preparation of same
US5719156A (en) * 1995-05-02 1998-02-17 Schering Corporation Piperazino derivatives as neurokinin antagonists
IL118279A (en) 1995-06-07 2006-10-05 Abbott Lab 3 - pyridyloxy (or thio) alkyl heterocyclic compounds, pharmaceutical compositions containing them and their uses in the preparation of medicaments for controlling chemical synaptic transmission
AU6386196A (en) * 1995-06-19 1997-01-15 Eli Lilly And Company Process for parallel synthesis of a non-peptide library
GB9517559D0 (en) * 1995-08-26 1995-10-25 Smithkline Beecham Plc Novel compounds
AU7432496A (en) * 1995-10-13 1998-05-11 Regents Of The University Of Minnesota Consolidated ligands with increased affinities and methods of use thereof
US5891643A (en) 1995-11-14 1999-04-06 Abbott Laboratories Use of nuclear magnetic resonance to design ligands to target biomolecules
US5846839A (en) 1995-12-22 1998-12-08 Glaxo Group Limited Methods for hard-tagging an encoded synthetic library
AU712607B2 (en) * 1996-02-02 1999-11-11 Merck & Co., Inc. Method of treating diabetes and related disease states
AU1856997A (en) * 1996-02-02 1997-08-22 Merck & Co., Inc. Method for raising hdl cholesterol levels
US5859051A (en) * 1996-02-02 1999-01-12 Merck & Co., Inc. Antidiabetic agents
US5847008A (en) * 1996-02-02 1998-12-08 Merck & Co., Inc. Method of treating diabetes and related disease states
US5792766A (en) * 1996-03-13 1998-08-11 Neurogen Corporation Imidazo 1,5-c! quinazolines; a new class of GABA brain receptor ligands
AU2332497A (en) 1996-03-19 1997-10-10 Salk Institute For Biological Studies, The (in vitro) methods for identifying modulators of members of the steroid/thyroid superfamily of receptors
US5965532A (en) 1996-06-28 1999-10-12 Trustees Of Tufts College Multivalent compounds for crosslinking receptors and uses thereof
IL127956A0 (en) * 1996-07-11 1999-11-30 Farmarc Nederland Bv Inclusion complex containing indole selective serotonin agonist
US6500934B1 (en) 1996-07-24 2002-12-31 Michael Rush Lerner Bivalent agonists for G-protein coupled receptors
DE19633560A1 (en) * 1996-08-21 1998-02-26 Basf Ag Chromanyl-ascorbic acid derivatives, their preparation and use
US5877214A (en) * 1996-09-12 1999-03-02 Merck & Co., Inc. Polyaryl-poly(ethylene glycol) supports for solution-phase combinatorial synthesis
WO1998011436A1 (en) 1996-09-13 1998-03-19 Whitehead Institute For Biomedical Research Non-specific affinity enhancement to identify combinatorial library members
DE19642751A1 (en) * 1996-10-16 1998-04-23 Deutsches Krebsforsch Saccharide library
CA2270394A1 (en) * 1996-10-31 1998-05-07 Novalon Pharmaceutical Corporation Identification of drugs using complementary combinatorial libraries
ES2178015T3 (en) 1996-11-11 2002-12-16 Sepracor Inc OPTICALLY PURE FORMOTEROL ISOMER PREPARATION PROCEDURE.
JPH10152460A (en) 1996-11-21 1998-06-09 Kissei Pharmaceut Co Ltd 2-amino-1-(4-hydroxy-2-methylphenyl)propanol derivative
US5958703A (en) * 1996-12-03 1999-09-28 Glaxo Group Limited Use of modified tethers in screening compound libraries
PL333920A1 (en) * 1996-12-10 2000-01-31 Abbott Lab 3-pyridyl enantiomers and their application as pain-relieving agents
ZA9711376B (en) * 1996-12-20 1998-07-21 Lundbeck & Co As H Indole or dihydroindole derivatives
US5830918A (en) * 1997-01-15 1998-11-03 Terrapin Technologies, Inc. Nonpeptide insulin receptor agonists
US5814647A (en) * 1997-03-04 1998-09-29 Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System Use of troglitazone and related compounds for the treatment of the climacteric symptoms
US5876946A (en) * 1997-06-03 1999-03-02 Pharmacopeia, Inc. High-throughput assay
CA2240325A1 (en) 1998-03-27 1998-11-14 Synsorb Biotech, Inc. Methods for screening compound libraries
US6541669B1 (en) 1998-06-08 2003-04-01 Theravance, Inc. β2-adrenergic receptor agonists

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4304721A (en) * 1979-09-06 1981-12-08 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Adrenergic blocking agents
US4587046A (en) * 1982-05-18 1986-05-06 The Regents Of The University Of California Drug-carrier conjugates

Non-Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
KIERSTEAD R. W., ET AL.: "SS1-SELECTIVE ADRENOCEPTOR ANTAGONISTS. 1. SYNTHESIS AND SS-ADRENERGIC BLOCKING ACTIVITY OF A SERIES OF BINARY (ARYLOXY)PROPANOLAMINES.", JOURNAL OF MEDICINAL CHEMISTRY, AMERICAN CHEMICAL SOCIETY, US, vol. 26., 1 January 1983 (1983-01-01), US, pages 1561 - 1569., XP002922560, ISSN: 0022-2623, DOI: 10.1021/jm00365a004 *
PITHA J, ET AL.: "BETA-ADRENERGIC ANTAGONISTS WITH MULTIPLE PHARMACOPHORES: PERSISTENT BLOCKADE OF RECEPTORS", JOURNAL OF MEDICINAL CHEMISTRY, AMERICAN CHEMICAL SOCIETY, US, vol. 26, 1 January 1983 (1983-01-01), US, pages 07 - 11, XP002922559, ISSN: 0022-2623, DOI: 10.1021/jm00355a002 *
PITHA J, ET AL.: "MACROMOLECULAR BETA-ADRENERGIC ANTAGONISTS DISCRIMINATING BETWEEN RECEPTOR AND ANTIBODY", PROCEEDINGS OF THE NATIONAL ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, NATIONAL ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, US, vol. 77, no. 04, 1 April 1980 (1980-04-01), US, pages 2219 - 2223, XP002922558, ISSN: 0027-8424, DOI: 10.1073/pnas.77.4.2219 *
SHUKER A. J., ET AL.: "SELECTIVE SS3 RECEPTOR AGONISTS AND SS ADRENERGIC MODULATORS FOR THE TREATMENT OF OBESITY AND NIDDM.", ABSTRACTS OF PAPERS. ACS NATIONAL MEETING., XX, XX, no. PART 01., 7 September 1997 (1997-09-07), XX, XP002922562 *
SHUKER S. B., ET AL.: "DISCOVERING HIGH-AFFINITY LIGANDS FOR PROTEINS: SAR BY NMR.", SCIENCE, AMERICAN ASSOCIATION FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE, US, vol. 274., 29 November 1996 (1996-11-29), US, pages 1531 - 1534., XP002922563, ISSN: 0036-8075, DOI: 10.1126/science.274.5292.1531 *
SIEGEL M.G., ET AL.: "THE USE OF HIGH-THROUGHPUT SYNTHESIS AND PURIFICATION IN THE PREPARATION OF A DIRECTED LIBRARY OF ADRENERGIC AGENTS.", MOLECULAR DIVERSITY., ESCOM SCIENCE PUBLISHERS, LEIDEN., NL, vol. 03., no. 02., 1 January 1998 (1998-01-01), NL, pages 113 - 116., XP002922561, ISSN: 1381-1991, DOI: 10.1023/A:1009602403514 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP1083888A1 (en) 2001-03-21
JP2002517460A (en) 2002-06-18
CA2321170A1 (en) 1999-12-16
AU4675499A (en) 1999-12-30
CA2318192C (en) 2010-01-05
WO1999063944A3 (en) 2000-02-10
WO1999063993A1 (en) 1999-12-16
WO1999063999A8 (en) 2000-09-14
AP1869A (en) 2008-07-14
AR019628A1 (en) 2002-02-27
JP2002517457A (en) 2002-06-18
AU4677699A (en) 2000-01-10
AU4675299A (en) 1999-12-30
CA2319496A1 (en) 1999-12-16
CN1193788C (en) 2005-03-23
CA2319159A1 (en) 1999-12-16
WO1999063936A3 (en) 2000-02-03
IL137412A0 (en) 2001-07-24
EP1019360A1 (en) 2000-07-19
WO1999063930A2 (en) 1999-12-16
WO1999064031A9 (en) 2000-05-04
DE69926861T2 (en) 2006-05-18
WO1999066944A1 (en) 1999-12-29
EP1085870A2 (en) 2001-03-28
AR031973A1 (en) 2003-10-22
CA2319497A1 (en) 1999-12-16
EP1085887A2 (en) 2001-03-28
WO1999064055A1 (en) 1999-12-16
JP2002517420A (en) 2002-06-18
JP2002517442A (en) 2002-06-18
WO1999064038A1 (en) 1999-12-16
EP1019075B9 (en) 2006-08-16
US6362371B1 (en) 2002-03-26
NO20006220L (en) 2001-01-29
WO1999066944A9 (en) 2000-07-27
PL346411A1 (en) 2002-02-11
WO1999064035A1 (en) 1999-12-16
WO1999064042A1 (en) 1999-12-16
NO20006220D0 (en) 2000-12-07
KR20010052634A (en) 2001-06-25
TWI252222B (en) 2006-04-01
SG93205A1 (en) 2002-12-17
WO1999063944A2 (en) 1999-12-16
AU4552099A (en) 1999-12-30
AU4423499A (en) 1999-12-30
US6288055B1 (en) 2001-09-11
EP1019360A4 (en) 2000-07-19
WO1999063936A2 (en) 1999-12-16
US6355805B1 (en) 2002-03-12
US20030087306A1 (en) 2003-05-08
US6541669B1 (en) 2003-04-01
CA2319651A1 (en) 1999-12-16
AU4337699A (en) 1999-12-30
EP1094826A1 (en) 2001-05-02
DE69926861D1 (en) 2005-09-29
WO1999064038A9 (en) 2000-05-04
EP1019075A1 (en) 2000-07-19
PE20000878A1 (en) 2000-09-15
CA2321273A1 (en) 1999-12-16
CA2318192A1 (en) 1999-12-16
CA2319643A1 (en) 1999-12-16
EP1082289A1 (en) 2001-03-14
EP1080080A1 (en) 2001-03-07
AU4336899A (en) 1999-12-30
AP2000001916A0 (en) 2000-09-30
AU4675399A (en) 1999-12-30
AU4675199A (en) 1999-12-30
WO1999063933A9 (en) 2000-04-27
AR031364A1 (en) 2003-09-24
PL192567B1 (en) 2006-11-30
CA2318894A1 (en) 1999-12-16
JP2002517459A (en) 2002-06-18
CA2319175A1 (en) 1999-12-16
CA2320926A1 (en) 1999-12-16
WO1999063936A9 (en) 2000-08-10
WO1999063983A9 (en) 2000-03-23
WO1999064000A1 (en) 1999-12-16
EP1107753A1 (en) 2001-06-20
WO1999063933A3 (en) 2000-02-03
HUP0201545A2 (en) 2002-09-28
EP1085847A2 (en) 2001-03-28
WO1999063936A8 (en) 2001-03-22
SG83721A1 (en) 2001-10-16
WO1999064052A1 (en) 1999-12-16
EP1085887A4 (en) 2001-03-28
BR9910832A (en) 2001-10-16
WO1999064034A1 (en) 1999-12-16
SG81994A1 (en) 2001-07-24
EP1085894A1 (en) 2001-03-28
CA2319751A1 (en) 1999-12-16
CA2321152A1 (en) 1999-12-16
WO1999063999A1 (en) 1999-12-16
WO1999064031A1 (en) 1999-12-16
AU4549199A (en) 1999-12-30
JP2002517462A (en) 2002-06-18
WO1999064041A1 (en) 1999-12-16
EP1083917A1 (en) 2001-03-21
EP1080080A4 (en) 2001-03-07
EP1085868A1 (en) 2001-03-28
EP1003540A1 (en) 2000-05-31
AU4674799A (en) 1999-12-30
AU4672799A (en) 1999-12-30
CA2319068A1 (en) 1999-12-16
AR030142A1 (en) 2003-08-13
CA2319650A1 (en) 1999-12-29
EP1083893A1 (en) 2001-03-21
AU4557099A (en) 1999-12-30
WO1999063983A1 (en) 1999-12-16
ES2247814T3 (en) 2006-03-01
WO1999064041A9 (en) 2001-05-31
HK1029535A1 (en) 2001-04-06
TR200003650T2 (en) 2001-08-21
DK1019075T3 (en) 2006-01-02
CN1295479A (en) 2001-05-16
WO1999063996A1 (en) 1999-12-16
HUP0201545A3 (en) 2003-01-28
CA2318055A1 (en) 1999-12-16
EP1102597A1 (en) 2001-05-30
EP1083921A1 (en) 2001-03-21
WO1999064055A9 (en) 2002-08-29
SG164266A1 (en) 2010-09-29
EP1019075A4 (en) 2000-12-13
CA2319756A1 (en) 1999-12-16
KR100593430B1 (en) 2006-06-28
EP1019075B1 (en) 2005-08-24
EP1100519A1 (en) 2001-05-23
WO1999063933A2 (en) 1999-12-16
WO1999063930A3 (en) 2000-01-27
WO1999064035A9 (en) 2000-07-06
WO1999063996A8 (en) 2001-02-22
CA2318286A1 (en) 1999-12-16
AU4543999A (en) 1999-12-30
AU4543599A (en) 1999-12-30
AU5203999A (en) 1999-12-30
AR019630A1 (en) 2002-02-27
WO1999064000A9 (en) 2000-04-20
JP2009280590A (en) 2009-12-03
WO1999064034A9 (en) 2000-06-29
SG83720A1 (en) 2001-10-16
JP2002517463A (en) 2002-06-18
EP1085889A2 (en) 2001-03-28
JP2002517421A (en) 2002-06-18
EP1082289A4 (en) 2001-03-14
WO1999063930A8 (en) 2001-03-08
AU4551599A (en) 1999-12-30
ATE302748T1 (en) 2005-09-15
CA2321120A1 (en) 1999-12-16
AU4426599A (en) 1999-12-30

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US6355805B1 (en) β3-adrenergic receptor agonists
AU781466B2 (en) Beta2-adrenergic receptor agonists
US6683115B2 (en) β2-adrenergic receptor agonists
US20040110229A1 (en) Muscarinic receptor antagonists
IL149317A (en) (2 - adrenergic receptor agonists, pharmaceutical compositions containing them and uses thereof in the preparation of medicaments
EP1086066A1 (en) Muscarinic receptor antagonists
US6713651B1 (en) β2-adrenergic receptor agonists
WO1999064039A9 (en) Bradykinin antagonists
AU750366B2 (en) Beta2-adrenergic receptor agonists
WO1999064046A9 (en) Multivalent agonists, partial agonists, inverse agonists and antagonists of the 5-ht3 receptors
ZA200004565B (en) β2-Adrenergic receptor agonists.

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY CA CH CN CU CZ DE DK EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MD MG MK MN MW MX NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT UA UG US US UZ VN YU ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW SD SL SZ UG ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2321120

Country of ref document: CA

Ref country code: CA

Ref document number: 2321120

Kind code of ref document: A

Format of ref document f/p: F

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1999937155

Country of ref document: EP

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 1999937155

Country of ref document: EP

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: 8642

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Ref document number: 1999937155

Country of ref document: EP